Rohde & Schwarz R&S ZNB User Manual
  1. Manuals
  2. Brands
  3. Rohde & Schwarz Manuals
  4. Measuring Instruments
  5. R&S ZNB
  6. User manual

Rohde & Schwarz R&S ZNB User Manual

Vector network analyzers
Hide thumbs Also See for R&S ZNB:
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
129
130
131
132
133
134
135
136
137
138
139
140
141
142
143
144
145
146
147
148
149
150
151
152
153
154
155
156
157
158
159
160
161
162
163
164
165
166
167
168
169
170
171
172
173
174
175
176
177
178
179
180
181
182
183
184
185
186
187
188
189
190
191
192
193
194
195
196
197
198
199
200
201
202
203
204
205
206
207
208
209
210
211
212
213
214
215
216
217
218
219
220
221
222
223
224
225
226
227
228
229
230
231
232
233
234
235
236
237
238
239
240
241
242
243
244
245
246
247
248
249
250
251
252
253
254
255
256
257
258
259
260
261
262
263
264
265
266
267
268
269
270
271
272
273
274
275
276
277
278
279
280
281
282
283
284
285
286
287
288
289
290
291
292
293
294
295
296
297
298
299
300
301
302
303
304
305
306
307
308
309
310
311
312
313
314
315
316
317
318
319
320
321
322
323
324
325
326
327
328
329
330
331
332
333
334
335
336
337
338
339
340
341
342
343
344
345
346
347
348
349
350
351
352
353
354
355
356
357
358
359
360
361
362
363
364
365
366
367
368
369
370
371
372
373
374
375
376
377
378
379
380
381
382
383
384
385
386
387
388
389
390
391
392
393
394
395
396
397
398
399
400
401
402
403
404
405
406
407
408
409
410
411
412
413
414
415
416
417
418
419
420
421
422
423
424
425
426
427
428
429
430
431
432
433
434
435
436
437
438
439
440
441
442
443
444
445
446
447
448
449
450
451
452
453
454
455
456
457
458
459
460
461
462
463
464
465
466
467
468
469
470
471
472
473
474
475
476
477
478
479
480
481
482
483
484
485
486
487
488
489
490
491
492
493
494
495
496
497
498
499
500
501
502
503
504
505
506
507
508
509
510
511
512
513
514
515
516
517
518
519
520
521
522
523
524
525
526
527
528
529
530
531
532
533
534
535
536
537
538
539
540
541
542
543
544
545
546
547
548
549
550
551
552
553
554
555
556
557
558
559
560
561
562
563
564
565
566
567
568
569
570
571
572
573
574
575
576
577
578
579
580
581
582
583
584
585
586
587
588
589
590
591
592
593
594
595
596
597
598
599
600
601
602
603
604
605
606
607
608
609
610
611
612
613
614
615
616
617
618
619
620
621
622
623
624
625
626
627
628
629
630
631
632
633
634
635
636
637
638
639
640
641
642
643
644
645
646
647
648
649
650
651
652
653
654
655
656
657
658
659
660
661
662
663
664
665
666
667
668
669
670
671
672
673
674
675
676
677
678
679
680
681
682
683
684
685
686
687
688
689
690
691
692
693
694
695
696
697
698
699
700
701
702
703
704
705
706
707
708
709
710
711
712
713
714
715
716
717
718
719
720
721
722
723
724
725
726
727
728
729
730
731
732
733
734
735
736
737
738
739
740
741
742
743
744
745
746
747
748
749
750
751
752
753
754
755
756
757
758
759
760
761
762
763
764
765
766
767
768
769
770
771
772
773
774
775
776
777
778
779
780
781
782
783
784
785
786
787
788
789
790
791
792
793
794
795
796
797
798
799
800
801
802
803
804
805
806
807
808
809
810
811
812
813
814
815
816
817
818
819
820
821
822
823
824
825
826
827
828
829
830
831
832
833
834
835
836
837
838
839
840
841
842
843
844
845
846
847
848
849
850
851
852
853
854
855
856
857
858
859
860
861
862
863
864
865
866
867
868
869
870
871
872
873
874
875
876
877
878
879
880
881
882
883
884
885
886
887
888
889
890
891
892
893
894
895
896
897
898
899
900
901
902
903
904
905
906
907
908
909
910
911
912
913
914
915
916
917
918
919
920
921
922
923
924
925
926
927
928
929
930
931
932
933
934
935
936
937
938
939
940
941
942
943
944
945
946
947
948
949
950
951
952
953
954
955
956
957
958
959
960
961
962
963
964
965
966
967
968
969
970
971
972
973
974
975
976
977
978
979
980
981
982
983
984
985
986
987
988
989
990
Table of Contents

Advertisement

Quick Links

R&S
Vector Network Analyzers
User Manual
(;×éÍ2)
1173916302
Distributed by:
Sie haben Fragen oder wünschen eine Beratung? Angebotsanfrage unter 07121 / 51 50 50 oder über info@datatec.de
®
ZNB/ZNBT

Advertisement

Table of Contents
loading
Need help?

Need help?

Do you have a question about the R&S ZNB and is the answer not in the manual?

Questions and answers

Related Manuals for Rohde & Schwarz R&S ZNB

Summary of Contents for Rohde & Schwarz R&S ZNB

  • Page 1 ® R&S ZNB/ZNBT Vector Network Analyzers User Manual (;×éÍ2) 1173916302 Distributed by: Sie haben Fragen oder wünschen eine Beratung? Angebotsanfrage unter 07121 / 51 50 50 oder über info@datatec.de...
  • Page 2 This manual describes the following vector network analyzer types and their options: ● ® R&S ZNB4, 9 kHz to 4.5 GHz, 2 test ports, order no. 1311.6010.22 ● ® R&S ZNB4, 9 kHz to 4.5 GHz, 4 test ports, order no. 1311.6010.24 ●...

  • Page 3: Table Of Contents

    ® Contents R&S ZNB/ZNBT Contents 1 Preface....................13 Documentation Overview................... 13 1.1.1 Getting Started Manual....................13 1.1.2 User Manual and Help....................13 1.1.3 Service Manual......................13 1.1.4 Instrument Security Procedures..................14 1.1.5 Basic Safety Instructions....................14 1.1.6 Data Sheets and Brochures..................14 1.1.7 Release Notes and Open Source Acknowledgment (OSA)..........
  • Page 4 ® Contents R&S ZNB/ZNBT 4.1.11 Changing the Screen Resolution (R&S ZNBT)............. 28 4.1.12 Remote Operation in a LAN..................28 Instrument Tour......................33 4.2.1 Front Panel R&S ZNB....................33 4.2.2 Front Panel R&S ZNBT....................39 4.2.3 Rear Panel R&S ZNB....................41 4.2.4 Rear Panel R&S ZNBT....................44 Operating the Instrument...................
  • Page 5 ® Contents R&S ZNB/ZNBT 5.3.5 Wave Quantities and Ratios..................125 5.3.6 Unbalance-Balance Conversion..................128 5.3.7 Stability Factors......................133 5.3.8 Delay, Aperture, Electrical Length................133 Operations on Traces....................134 5.4.1 Limit Check......................... 134 5.4.2 Trace Files........................141 5.4.3 Memory-Mapped Trace Data Transfer................ 146 Calibration......................... 148 5.5.1 Calibration Types......................
  • Page 6 ® Contents R&S ZNB/ZNBT 5.7.13 RFFE GPIO Interface....................229 5.7.14 Additional Removable System Drive................231 5.7.15 Extended Power Range....................231 5.7.16 Extended Dynamic Range..................232 5.7.17 Receiver Step Attenuators..................233 5.7.18 DC Inputs........................234 5.7.19 USB-to-IEC/IEEE Adapter...................237 5.7.20 External Power Meters....................237 5.7.21 External Generators....................
  • Page 7 ® Contents R&S ZNB/ZNBT 6.5.4 Math Tab........................305 6.5.5 Time Domain Tab......................311 6.5.6 Time Gate Tab......................316 6.5.7 Distance to Fault Tab....................318 6.5.8 Trace Statistics Tab..................... 326 6.5.9 Smooth Shift Hold Tab....................332 6.5.10 Infinite Averaging Tab....................336 6.5.11 Trace Data Tab......................336 Lines Softtool......................
  • Page 8 ® Contents R&S ZNB/ZNBT 6.10.1 Sweep Params Tab..................... 393 6.10.2 Sweep Type Tab......................396 6.10.3 Trigger Tab........................407 6.10.4 Sweep Control Tab......................412 6.11 Cal Softtool........................ 415 6.11.1 Start Cal Tab....................... 416 6.11.2 Cal Devices Tab......................478 6.11.3 Pwr Cal Settings Tab....................490 6.11.4 Use Cal Tab.........................497 6.12...
  • Page 9 ® Contents R&S ZNB/ZNBT 6.14.6 More Tab........................611 6.15 Applic Softtool......................612 6.15.1 External Tools Application................... 612 6.15.2 TDR Application (R&S ZNB/ZNBT-K20)..............614 6.15.3 DUT Centric Application....................641 6.16 Display Softtool......................656 6.16.1 Diagram Tab........................656 6.16.2 Split Tab........................659 6.16.3 Config Tab........................662 6.16.4 View Bar Tab.......................
  • Page 10 ® Contents R&S ZNB/ZNBT 7.3.3 Initiating Measurements, Speed Considerations............728 7.3.4 Addressing Traces and Channels................729 Command Processing....................730 7.4.1 Input Unit........................730 7.4.2 Command Recognition....................731 7.4.3 Data Base and Instrument Hardware................731 7.4.4 Status Reporting System.................... 732 7.4.5 Output Unit........................732 7.4.6 Command Sequence and Command Synchronization..........
  • Page 11 ® Contents R&S ZNB/ZNBT 8.3.11 MMEMory Commands....................1020 8.3.12 OUTPut Commands....................1062 8.3.13 PROGram Commands....................1067 8.3.14 [SENSe:] Commands....................1070 8.3.15 SOURce Commands....................1205 8.3.16 STATus Commands....................1253 8.3.17 SYSTem Commands....................1256 8.3.18 TRACe Commands....................1298 8.3.19 TRIGger Commands....................1301 R&S ZVR/ZVABT Compatible Commands.............1308 9 Programming Examples..............
  • Page 12 ® Contents R&S ZNB/ZNBT 11.1.1 Windows Operating System..................1379 11.1.2 Firmware Installation....................1380 11.2 System Recovery....................1381 11.3 Interfaces and Connectors..................1381 11.3.1 Rear Panel Connectors.....................1381 11.3.2 LAN Interface......................1383 11.3.3 GPIB Interface......................1384 11.3.4 Handler I/O (Universal Interface)................1387 11.3.5 RFFE - GPIO Interface .....................1395 11.4 Maintenance......................

  • Page 13: Preface

    ® Preface R&S ZNB/ZNBT Documentation Overview 1 Preface This chapter provides safety-related information, an overview of the user documenta- tion and the conventions used in the documentation. 1.1 Documentation Overview This section provides an overview of the R&S ZNB/ZNBT user documentation. Unless specified otherwise, you find the documents on the R&S ZNB/ZNBT product page at: ●...

  • Page 14: Instrument Security Procedures

    ® Preface R&S ZNB/ZNBT Documentation Overview ● R&S ZNBT Service Manual 1.1.4 Instrument Security Procedures Deals with security issues when working with the R&S ZNB/ZNBT in secure areas. It is available for download on the Internet. 1.1.5 Basic Safety Instructions Contains safety instructions, operating conditions and further important information.

  • Page 15: Conventions Used In The Documentation

    ® Preface R&S ZNB/ZNBT Conventions Used in the Documentation 1.2 Conventions Used in the Documentation 1.2.1 Typographical Conventions The following text markers are used throughout this documentation: Convention Description [Keys] Key and knob names are enclosed by square brackets. "Graphical user interface ele- All names of graphical user interface elements on the screen, such as ments"...

  • Page 16: Safety Information

    ® Safety Information R&S ZNB/ZNBT 2 Safety Information The product documentation helps you use the R&S ZNB/ZNBT safely and efficiently. Follow the instructions provided here and in the printed "Basic Safety Instructions". Keep the product documentation nearby and offer it to other users. Intended use The R&S ZNB/ZNBT is intended for the development, production and verification of electronic components and devices in industrial, administrative, and laboratory environ-...

  • Page 17: Firmware V3.12

    ® Firmware V3.12 R&S ZNB/ZNBT Changes in Firmware Version 3.10 3 Firmware V3.12 Version 3.12 of the R&S ZNB/ZNBT firmware provides the following changes: Solved issues ● Firmware versions 3.x created incompatible *.calkit files (*.calkit files containing snp data could not be used with previous FW versions) ●...
  • Page 18 ® Firmware V3.12 R&S ZNB/ZNBT Changes in Firmware Version 3.10 – Logarithmic interpolation See "Interpolation" column in Chapter 6.6.1.2, "Define Limit Lines Dialog", on page 348 ● Cal kit data added: – N 50 Ω Keysight 85032B, 85032F, 85515A R&S ZN-Z170 typical Spinner BN533843, BN533844, BN533863, BN533864 –...

  • Page 19: Getting Started

    ® Getting Started R&S ZNB/ZNBT Putting the Analyzer into Operation 4 Getting Started 4.1 Putting the Analyzer into Operation This section describes the basic steps to be taken when setting up the analyzer for the first time. Simple measurement examples are provided in Chapter 4.4, "Performing Measure- ments", on page 71;...

  • Page 20: Positioning The Instrument

    ® Getting Started R&S ZNB/ZNBT Putting the Analyzer into Operation Risk of injury during transportation The carrying handles at the front and side of the casing are designed to lift or carry the instrument. Do not apply excessive force to the handles. If a handle is ripped off, the falling instrument can cause injury.

  • Page 21: Bench Top Operation

    ® Getting Started R&S ZNB/ZNBT Putting the Analyzer into Operation 4.1.3 Bench Top Operation If the analyzer is operated on a bench top, the surface must be flat. The instrument can be used in horizontal or vertical position, standing on its feet, or with the support feet on the bottom expanded.

  • Page 22: Emi Suppression

    ® Getting Started R&S ZNB/ZNBT Putting the Analyzer into Operation 4.1.5 EMI Suppression Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) can affect the measurement results. To suppress generated Electromagnetic Interference: ● Use suitable shielded cables of high quality (see table below) ● Always terminate open cable ends ●...

  • Page 23: Starting The Analyzer And Shutting Down

    ® Getting Started R&S ZNB/ZNBT Putting the Analyzer into Operation Risk of data loss due to voltage dips For a R&S ZNBT40 with 24 ports, a voltage dip with a duration of 18 ms or higher can cause a reboot of the instrument. I.e. in its maximum configuration, the R&S ZNBT40 does not fully comply with standard EN 61326-2-1, chapter 6.4.101.

  • Page 24: Standby And Ready State

    ® Getting Started R&S ZNB/ZNBT Putting the Analyzer into Operation The AC power switch can be permanently on. It is recommendable, however, to switch it off if the instrument is not used for some time. When you switch the instrument back on, be sure to comply with the extended warm-up phase specified in the data sheet.
  • Page 25 ® Getting Started R&S ZNB/ZNBT Putting the Analyzer into Operation 4.1.9.1 Connecting a Monitor A standard monitor can be connected to the DVI-D connector of the R&S ZNB/ZNBT. No extra configuration is required. Instruments equipped with the latest controller board also offer a DisplayPort. Safety aspects The monitor must be connected while the instrument is switched off (or in standby mode).
  • Page 26 ® Getting Started R&S ZNB/ZNBT Putting the Analyzer into Operation ® To access Windows , use the button in the toolbar of the application window. 4.1.9.4 Connecting a Printer A printer can be connected to any of the USB connectors. After successful installation, it can safely be disconnected and reconnected even during measurements.

  • Page 27: Minimizing The Vna Application

    ® Getting Started R&S ZNB/ZNBT Putting the Analyzer into Operation ment. For both connection types, you can use either crossover or straight through (patch) cables. The IP address information is shown in the SYSTEM – [SETUP] > "Remote Settings" softtool tab. For the R&S ZNBT, it is also shown on the Mini display.

  • Page 28: Changing The Screen Resolution (R&S Znbt)

    ® Getting Started R&S ZNB/ZNBT Putting the Analyzer into Operation A software update restores the original shortcut properties. 4.1.11 Changing the Screen Resolution (R&S ZNBT) In case the R&S ZNBT fails to adjust the display resolution properly when an external monitor is connected, proceed as follows: 1.
  • Page 29 ® Getting Started R&S ZNB/ZNBT Putting the Analyzer into Operation Virus protection An efficient virus protection is a prerequisite for secure operation in the network. Never connect your analyzer to an unprotected network. For useful hints, see the following Rohde & Schwarz application note: ●...
  • Page 30 ® Getting Started R&S ZNB/ZNBT Putting the Analyzer into Operation To enter the TCP/IP address information manually 1. Obtain the IP address and subnet mask for the analyzer and the IP address for the local default gateway from your network administrator. If necessary, also obtain the name of your DNS domain and the IP addresses of the DNS and WINS servers on your network.
  • Page 31 ® Getting Started R&S ZNB/ZNBT Putting the Analyzer into Operation 4.1.12.2 Using Computer Names In a LAN that uses a DNS server (Domain Name System server), each PC or instru- ment connected in the LAN can be accessed via an unambiguous computer name instead of the IP address.
  • Page 32 ® Getting Started R&S ZNB/ZNBT Putting the Analyzer into Operation 4.1.12.3 Remote Desktop Connection ® Remote Desktop is a Windows application which you can use to access and control the analyzer from a remote computer through a LAN connection. While the measure- ment is running, the analyzer screen contents are displayed on the remote computer, and Remote Desktop provides access to all of the applications, files, and network resources of the analyzer.

  • Page 33: Instrument Tour

    ® Getting Started R&S ZNB/ZNBT Instrument Tour Some actions require a different firewall configuration, e.g.: ● To transfer data with other hosts in the LAN, you have to allow "File and Printer Sharing". To change the firewall settings, proceed as follows: ®...
  • Page 34 ® Getting Started R&S ZNB/ZNBT Instrument Tour Figure 4-2: R&S ZNB40 with two ports 4.2.1.1 Touchscreen The analyzer is equipped with a 12.1'' XGA color touchscreen. The touchscreen pres- ents all measurement results, mostly in the form of diagrams. Besides, all instrument functions can be accessed and operated by tapping the control elements on the touch- screen.
  • Page 35 ® Getting Started R&S ZNB/ZNBT Instrument Tour Screen saver The screen saver function of the operating system can be used to switch off the display if the analyzer receives no command for a selectable period of time. The display is switched on again if any front panel key is pressed.
  • Page 36 ® Getting Started R&S ZNB/ZNBT Instrument Tour The SYSTEM keys provide general system settings. ● ® [FILE] provides standard Windows functions used to create, save, recall or print recall sets, to copy the active screen and to shut down the application. ●...
  • Page 37 ® Getting Started R&S ZNB/ZNBT Instrument Tour – Confirm selections and entries made and close dialogs (equivalent to the "OK" button). – Compress or expand menus or the Help table of contents ● BACKSPACE deletes the last character before the cursor position or the selected character sequence or numeric value.
  • Page 38 ® Getting Started R&S ZNB/ZNBT Instrument Tour The standby toggle switch is located in the bottom left corner of the front panel. The key serves two main purposes: ● Toggle between standby and ready state; see Chapter 4.1.8, "Standby and Ready State", on page 24.

  • Page 39: Front Panel R&S Znbt

    ® Getting Started R&S ZNB/ZNBT Instrument Tour The USB ports can be used to connect: ● External PC accessories such as mouse or other pointing devices, a keyboard, printer or external storage device (USB stick, CD-ROM drive etc.). ● External measurement equipment such as a calibration unit, power meter, signal generator or switch matrix.
  • Page 40 ® Getting Started R&S ZNB/ZNBT Instrument Tour Numbered test port connectors: ● Type N female connectors for the R&S ZNBT8. Depending on the equipped port options there are 4, 8, 12, 16, 20 or 24 test ports. ● 3.5 mm male connectors for the R&S ZNBT20. Depending on the equipped port options there are 8, 12, 16, 20 or 24 test ports.

  • Page 41: Rear Panel R&S Znb

    ® Getting Started R&S ZNB/ZNBT Instrument Tour – Warning: setting errors (e.g. generator power out of range) – Error <error code>: severe errors (e.g. FW boot errors, HW errors) ● Control mode: – "Local": manual interaction (e.g. via Remote Desktop) –...
  • Page 42 ® Getting Started R&S ZNB/ZNBT Instrument Tour 9 10 Figure 4-4: R&S ZNB rear view Table 4-2: Rear panel connectors available on all instruments Index Label Description (Power Power on / off switch, see Chapter 4.1.7, "Starting the Analyzer and Shutting Down", I/O) on page 23...
  • Page 43 ® Getting Started R&S ZNB/ZNBT Instrument Tour Index Label Description REF IN BNC input for an external reference frequency. Use this connector to synchronize the R&S ZNB to another device. Chapter 6.17.2, "Freq. Ref. Tab", on page 687. (System Contains the removable system drive of the R&S ZNB, containing all software drive) (including the operating system and the VNA application) and data.

  • Page 44: Rear Panel R&S Znbt

    ® Getting Started R&S ZNB/ZNBT Instrument Tour Input levels, EMC The maximum input levels and voltages of the input connectors at the front and rear panel must not be exceeded. Match signals with 50 Ω to comply with EMC directives. See also Chapter 4.1.5, "EMI Suppression",...
  • Page 45 ® Getting Started R&S ZNB/ZNBT Instrument Tour Index Label Description Monitor External monitor connector (DisplayPort); see Chapter 4.1.9.1, "Connecting a Moni- (Display- tor", on page 25. Port) Type B USB 3.0 device (slave) connector for remote control of the instrument (see Device Chapter 4.1.9.6, "Connecting a USB Cable for Remote Control",...

  • Page 46: Operating The Instrument

    ® Getting Started R&S ZNB/ZNBT Operating the Instrument Input levels, EMC The maximum input levels and voltages of the input connectors at the front and rear panel must not be exceeded. Match signals with 50 Ω to comply with EMC directives. See also Chapter 4.1.5, "EMI Suppression",...
  • Page 47 ® Getting Started R&S ZNB/ZNBT Operating the Instrument Figure 4-6: Function Keys Customizing the screen The contents of the screen and the size and position of many display and control ele- ments are not fixed. You can display or hide most elements. You can also drag and drop traces, info fields, and even the softtool panel to your preferred position;...
  • Page 48 ® Getting Started R&S ZNB/ZNBT Operating the Instrument 2. Activate the desired softtool tab, e.g. "Z←Sij". 3. Select a control element, e.g. "Z←S11". The diagram immediately reflects your selection. The active trace shows the mea- surement results for the selected measured quantity. A control element with three dots (e.g.
  • Page 49 ® Getting Started R&S ZNB/ZNBT Operating the Instrument Using the menu bar The menu bar at the bottom of the application screen provides alternative access to all instrument functions. To repeat the measured quantity selection described above, ► Select TRACE – [MEAS] > "Z←Sij" > "Z←S11". The diagram immediately reflects your selection.
  • Page 50 ® Getting Started R&S ZNB/ZNBT Operating the Instrument 2. Select "S-Parameter" to open the "Meas" > "S-Params" softtool tab. 3. Select "Z←Sij" > "Z←S11". User Manual 1173.9163.02 ─ 53...

  • Page 51: Control Elements Of The Application Window

    ® Getting Started R&S ZNB/ZNBT Operating the Instrument 4.3.2 Control Elements of the Application Window The application window of the analyzer provides all control elements for the measure- ments and contains the diagrams for the results. There are several alternative ways for accessing an instrument function: ●...
  • Page 52 ® Getting Started R&S ZNB/ZNBT Operating the Instrument These methods are described in more detail in the following sections. For further reference: ● Refer to Chapter 5.2.1, "Display Elements of a Diagram", on page 92 to obtain information about the results in the diagram. ●...
  • Page 53 ® Getting Started R&S ZNB/ZNBT Operating the Instrument The toolbar is divided into six icon groups, separated by vertical lines. These icons represent the undo and redo actions that are also available via the menu bar items "System" > "Undo" / "Redo". Undo reverses the last action, redo reverses the last undo action (if possi- ble).
  • Page 54 ® Getting Started R&S ZNB/ZNBT Operating the Instrument Figure 4-7: Scale softtool A softtool consists of a title area with a close/re-open icon and a tabbed panel below it. The title area remains displayed when the softtool is closed, which allows you to reopen a closed softtool at any time.
  • Page 55 ® Getting Started R&S ZNB/ZNBT Operating the Instrument ● The "Display" menu provides all display settings and the functions for activating, modifying and arranging different diagrams. ● The "Applications" menu gives access to applications and tools that extend the functionality of the analyzer firmware. ●...
  • Page 56 ® Getting Started R&S ZNB/ZNBT Operating the Instrument 4.3.2.6 Hardkey Panel The (virtual) "Hard Key" panel provides on-screen access to the function keys (plus the [UNDO] and [REDO] key) that are available at the front panel of a R&S ZNB. Most of the function keys open a related softtool.

  • Page 57: Working With Dialogs

    ® Getting Started R&S ZNB/ZNBT Operating the Instrument ● the "EXT REF" symbol, if an external reference clock is used for synchronization (see "Ext Frequency" on page 687) ● a symbol for redefined S-parameters, if the physical ports have been redefined (see Chapter 6.17.5.2, "Define Physical Ports Dialog",...

  • Page 58: Handling Diagrams, Traces, And Markers

    ® Getting Started R&S ZNB/ZNBT Operating the Instrument All dialogs are operated in a similar way. ● To open a dialog, select a softtool button with three dots appearing in its label (e.g. "Start... (Manual)"). ● The title bar of each dialog contains some convenience functions: –...
  • Page 59 ® Getting Started R&S ZNB/ZNBT Operating the Instrument trace. The following section presents some of the graphical tools the R&S ZNB/ZNBT provides for trace and marker handling. For further reference Refer to Chapter 5, "Concepts and Features", on page 80 to learn more about traces, channels, and screen elements.
  • Page 60 ® Getting Started R&S ZNB/ZNBT Operating the Instrument 3. In the dialog box that is opened when you release the "New Trace" icon, select the S-parameter to be measured. For a four-port analyzer: The R&S ZNB/ZNBT generates a new trace for the selected S-parameter. Alternative control elements To measure a different quantity, select TRACE –...
  • Page 61 ® Getting Started R&S ZNB/ZNBT Operating the Instrument Active trace, alternative control elements The trace line of the active trace in the upper part of the diagram is highlighted. If the diagram contains several traces, first activate the target trace, then add the marker. The TRACE –...

  • Page 62: Entering Data

    ® Getting Started R&S ZNB/ZNBT Operating the Instrument 4.3.4.4 Using Drag and Drop You can drag and drop many of the R&S ZNB/ZNBT's control and display elements to change their size and position. The drag and drop functionality is often more conven- ient to use than the equivalent buttons of the softtool panels.
  • Page 63 ® Getting Started R&S ZNB/ZNBT Operating the Instrument To enter a numeric value: 1. Select a numeric data input field to activate it. 2. Press the data entry keys. ● Use [0] to [9] to enter the corresponding numbers. ● Use [.] to enter a decimal point.
  • Page 64 ® Getting Started R&S ZNB/ZNBT Operating the Instrument 4.3.5.2 Using the Numeric Editor The "Numeric Editor" is a tool for convenient entry and modification of numeric values. It is available for all numeric input fields in the analyzer GUI. Operation with touchscreen or mouse: 1.
  • Page 65 ® Getting Started R&S ZNB/ZNBT Operating the Instrument 1. Activate a character data input field in a softtool or a dialog. 2. Double-tap/click the input field to open the on-screen keyboard. 3. Select character buttons to compose the input string. 4.

  • Page 66: Scaling Diagrams

    ® Getting Started R&S ZNB/ZNBT Operating the Instrument 4.3.6 Scaling Diagrams The analyzer provides various tools for customizing the diagrams and for setting the sweep range. Choose the method that is most convenient for you. 4.3.6.1 Using the Graphical Zoom The graphical zoom function magnifies a rectangular portion of the diagram (zoom win- dow) to fill the entire diagram area.
  • Page 67 ® Getting Started R&S ZNB/ZNBT Operating the Instrument Use the "Zoom Reset" icon to restore the original diagram. Alternatively, you can drag and drop the "Zoom" label from the additional channel info line onto the toolbar but- ton. Alternative settings ●...
  • Page 68 ® Getting Started R&S ZNB/ZNBT Operating the Instrument To change the sweep range of the active channel, use one of the following methods: ● Use the [START], [STOP], [CENTER], and [SPAN] function keys from the STIMU- LUS section. ● Double-tap (with a mouse: double-click) the "Start" or "Stop" label in the channel list.
  • Page 69 ® Getting Started R&S ZNB/ZNBT Operating the Instrument 4.3.6.5 Circular Diagrams The radial scale of a circular diagram ("Polar", "Smith" or "Inverted Smith") can be changed with a single linear parameter, the "Ref Value". The reference value defines the radius of the outer circumference. ●...
  • Page 70 ® Getting Started R&S ZNB/ZNBT Operating the Instrument 2. Place "M1" to the start value of the desired sweep range and tap TRACE – [MARKER] > "Set by Marker" > "Start = Marker". 3. Place "M2" to the stop value of the desired sweep range and tap TRACE – [MARKER] >...

  • Page 71: Performing Measurements

    ® Getting Started R&S ZNB/ZNBT Performing Measurements 4.4 Performing Measurements This chapter takes you through a sample session with a R&S ZNB/ZNBT network ana- lyzer and describes basic operation tasks. Safety considerations Before starting any measurement on your network analyzer, please note the instruc- tions given in Chapter 4.1, "Putting the Analyzer into Operation",...
  • Page 72 ® Getting Started R&S ZNB/ZNBT Performing Measurements 4.4.1.1 Connecting the Instrument for Transmission Measurements To prepare a transmission measurement, you have to connect your DUT (which for simplicity we assume to have appropriate connectors) in-between a pair of analyzer test ports. It is recommended that you preset the R&S ZNB/ZNBT to start from a well- defined instrument state.
  • Page 73 ® Getting Started R&S ZNB/ZNBT Performing Measurements 1. Connect the DUT between test ports 1 and 2 of the network analyzer as shown above. 2. Switch on the instrument and start the VNA application. Proceed as described in Chapter 4.1.7, "Starting the Analyzer and Shutting Down", on page 23.
  • Page 74 ® Getting Started R&S ZNB/ZNBT Performing Measurements 2. In the "Stop Frequency" input field, enter the highest frequency you want to mea- sure (e.g. 2.5 GHz). 3. Select TRACE – [SCALE] > "Scale Values" and activate the "Auto Scale Trace" function.
  • Page 75 ® Getting Started R&S ZNB/ZNBT Performing Measurements Tip: For a R&S ZNBT with more than 4 ports, the graphical port representation is replaced by a generic port list. The selection logic is unchanged. 4. Select "Next" to proceed to the next page of the "Calibration Setting" wizard. 5.
  • Page 76 ® Getting Started R&S ZNB/ZNBT Performing Measurements 7. The calibration dock widget indicates the standard measurements that make up a "Trans Norm" calibration. Select "Through (mm)" to initiate the measurement of the connected Through stan- dard. Measuring the isolation between ports 1 and 2 is optional. Skip it for now. The analyzer performs a calibration sweep for the measured quantity S .
  • Page 77 ® Getting Started R&S ZNB/ZNBT Performing Measurements corner of the diagram. The marker info field displays the stimulus value (frequency) and response value (magnitude of the transmission coefficient converted to a dB value) at the marker position. 2. Select TRACE – [MARKER], activate the "Marker Search" softtool tab and activate "Min"...

  • Page 78: Reflection S-Parameter Measurement

    ® Getting Started R&S ZNB/ZNBT Performing Measurements Data transfer is made easier if external accessories are connected to the analyzer or if the instrument is integrated into a LAN. Refer to Chapter 4.1.9, "Connecting External Accessories", on page 24, and Chapter 4.1.12, "Remote Operation in a LAN", on page 28 to obtain information about the necessary steps.
  • Page 79 ® Getting Started R&S ZNB/ZNBT Performing Measurements You can also use the basic transmission test setup, e.g. if you want to measure reflection and transmission parameters in parallel. ● The analyzer provides special calibration types for reflection measurements. Use the calibration wizard and select an appropriate type. A full n-port calibration (TOSM, UOSM, TNA ...) corrects the system errors for all transmission and reflection S-parameters.

  • Page 80: Concepts And Features

    ® Concepts and Features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Basic Concepts 5 Concepts and Features The following chapter provides an overview of the analyzer's capabilities and their use. It contains a description of the basic concepts that the analyzer uses to organize, proc- ess and display measurement data.

  • Page 81: Recall Sets

    ® Concepts and Features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Basic Concepts ● Cal pool data including system error correction and power correction data ● Directories for trace data, limit lines, calibration data etc. ● Color schemes and printer settings ● System configurations, to be accessed via SYSTEM – [SETUP]. ●...
  • Page 82 ® Concepts and Features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Basic Concepts 5.1.3.1 Trace Settings The trace settings specify the mathematical operations used to obtain traces from the measured or stored data. They can be divided into several main groups: ● Selection of the measured quantity (S-parameters, wave quantities, ratios, impe- dances,...) ●...

  • Page 83: Sweep Control

    ® Concepts and Features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Basic Concepts 5.1.3.3 Active and Inactive Traces and Channels A window can display several diagrams simultaneously, each with a variable number of traces. One of these traces is active at each time. The active trace is highlighted in the trace list on top of the active diagram (Trc4 in the figure below): When a trace is selected in the diagram area, it becomes the active trace.
  • Page 84 ® Concepts and Features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Basic Concepts After changing the channel settings or selecting another measured quantity, the ana- lyzer needs some time to initialize the new sweep. This preparation period increases with the number of points and the number of partial measurements involved. It indica- ted in the status bar: All analyzer settings can still be changed during sweep initialization.
  • Page 85 ® Concepts and Features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Basic Concepts Use the "Alternated" mode to increase the accuracy of measurements on DUTs with long level settling times (e.g. quartzes, SAW filters). To measure DUTs with short set- tling times and obtain a trace from the beginning of the sweep, use "Chopped" mode. In "Auto"...
  • Page 86 ® Concepts and Features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Basic Concepts DUT1 DUT2 ● For analyzers with Internal Second Source, to reduce "crosstalk" between the DUTs a frequency offset can be applied between the corresponding port groups (see "Parallel Measurements with Frequency Offset" on page 87).
  • Page 87 ® Concepts and Features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Basic Concepts Example: DUT 1 (two ports): drive port order 1, 2 DUT 2 (two ports): drive port order 2, 1 DUT 3 (four ports): drive port order 3, 4, 1, 2 DUT 4 (four ports): drive port order 4, 3, 2, 1 With "port x-y"...
  • Page 88 ® Concepts and Features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Basic Concepts Please note that in parallel measurement with frequency offset the firmware uses a modified IF as compared to measurements not using this mode. Because this modified IF requires a special calibration, it is essential to perform the Calibration with the same Frequency Offset settings as for the actual measurement;...
  • Page 89 ® Concepts and Features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Basic Concepts The power corresponds to the actual source power at the test ports (channel base power P ). After a port power calibration, this source power is available at the cali- brated reference plane. ●...

  • Page 90: Data Flow

    ® Concepts and Features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Basic Concepts If the swept mode is selected and the R&S ZNB/ZNBT actually uses it (for at least one segment), this is indicated in the status bar: If on the other hand the swept mode is not used although it was selected, the underly- ing reason is displayed in an information popup: ●...
  • Page 91 ® Concepts and Features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Basic Concepts SYST. ERR. CORR. POWER POWER POWER (FACT) CORR. CORRECTION DATA CORR. DATA SYST. ERR. RATIOS SYSTEM CORR. ERROR CORR. DATA (USER) Channel data flow (for all traces of the channel) OFFSET (ALT. 1) S - parameters Wave quantities, ratios DEEMBEDDING...

  • Page 92: Screen Elements

    ® Concepts and Features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Screen Elements 5.2 Screen Elements This section describes manual operation of the analyzer, including trace settings, mark- ers and diagrams. For a description of the different quantities measured by the instru- ment, refer to Chapter 5.3, "Measurement Results", on page 115.
  • Page 93 ® Concepts and Features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Screen Elements 5.2.1.1 Title An optional title across the top of the diagram can be used for a brief description of the diagram contents. Select SYSTEM – [DISPLAY] > "Diagram" > "Title" to enter the diagram title and "Show Title"...
  • Page 94 ® Concepts and Features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Screen Elements It is possible to generate an unlimited number of memory traces from a data trace and display them together. Markers and marker functions are available for all trace types. The type of each trace in a diagram is indicated in the trace list: "MEM<no>" at the beginning of the trace name indicates a memory trace (with default naming), Math at the end of the trace label indicates a mathematical trace.
  • Page 95 ® Concepts and Features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Screen Elements ● The respective section's context menu (except for the type section) provides access to the most common related tasks. ● If the size of the diagram is too small, some of the sections are hidden. Enlarge or maximize the diagram to display all sections.
  • Page 96 ® Concepts and Features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Screen Elements ● A normal marker ("M1, M2...") determines the coordinates of a measurement point on the trace. ● The reference marker ("R") defines the reference value for all delta markers. ● A delta marker ("DeltaM1, DeltaM2...") indicates the coordinates relative to the ref- erence marker.
  • Page 97 ® Concepts and Features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Screen Elements The info field contains the following information: ● "M1, M2..." denote the marker numbers. Markers are displayed with the same color as the associated trace. ● The marker coordinates are expressed in one of the marker formats selected via TRACE –...
  • Page 98 ® Concepts and Features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Screen Elements Info Table If you wish to reserve the full diagram space for traces, you can drag & drop the marker info field to the info table. The info table is hidden by default. To display it, open the "Display" softtool (SYSTEM – [DISPLAY]), activate its "Config"...
  • Page 99 ® Concepts and Features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Screen Elements Marker Format Description Formula Lin Mag Phase Magnitude of z (unconverted) and phase in two |z| arctan ( Im(z) / Re(z) ) lines Real Imag Real and imaginary part of z in two lines R + j X (Series) impedance: Unnormalized (series) resistance, reactance, and...
  • Page 100 ® Concepts and Features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Screen Elements Marker coupling can be enabled: ● either for all traces in the active recall set that have the same stimulus variable as the active trace ● or for all traces in a channel ●...
  • Page 101 ® Concepts and Features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Screen Elements Bandfilter Search In a bandfilter search, the R&S ZNB/ZNBT locates trace segments with a bandpass or bandstop shape and determines characteristic filter parameters. Bandpass and bandstop regions can be described with the same parameter set: ●...
  • Page 102 ® Concepts and Features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Screen Elements 5.2.1.4 Channel List and Channel Settings The main properties of all channels assigned to the traces in the diagram are displayed in the channel list below the diagram. Each line in the channel list describes a single channel. The channel of the active trace is highlighted.

  • Page 103: Dialogs

    ® Concepts and Features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Screen Elements Open a segment's context menu to access common related tasks. Example: The following context menu is assigned to the channel name section: The settings in the context menus correspond to the most common functions in the CHANNEL –...
  • Page 104 ® Concepts and Features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Screen Elements Ports...") call up a dialog. The dialogs of the analyzer have an analogous structure and several common control elements. Dialogs are controlled in the usual way. For an introduction, refer to Chapter 4.3.3, "Working with Dialogs", on page 57.
  • Page 105 ® Concepts and Features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Screen Elements Immediate settings can be undone using [UNDO]. 5.2.2.2 Common Dialogs Open Dialog The "Open File" dialog is used to open various file types (cal kit data, limit lines, sweep segment lists, ...). Depending on the context, the dialog is displayed with different caption, default direc- tory ("Traces"...
  • Page 106 ® Concepts and Features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Screen Elements Depending on the context, the dialog is displayed with different caption, default direc- tory ("Traces" in the above screenshot), and file types. Context-specific options (e.g. "Output Format" in the dialog above) are accessible via controls in the section below the "Ask Before Overwriting"...

  • Page 107: Trace Formats

    ® Concepts and Features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Screen Elements Figure 5-2: Multi-channel setup dialog The channel selector in the title bar and the channel-related buttons in the lower part of the dialog ("Copy to New Channel", "Copy to New Ch + Diagram" allow you to select the target channels.
  • Page 108 ® Concepts and Features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Screen Elements Diagram Representation When a Cartesian trace is assigned to a diagram, the stimulus variable appears on the horizontal axis (x-axis), the response values appear on the vertical axis (y-axis). Graph Scaling ● Except for the "Log Mag"...
  • Page 109 ® Concepts and Features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Screen Elements Trace Format Description Formula "Lin Mag" Magnitude of z, unconverted |z| = sqrt ( x "Real" Real part of z Re(z) = x "Imag" Imaginary part of z Im(z) = y "Delay" Group delay, neg.
  • Page 110 ® Concepts and Features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Screen Elements Example: Reflection coefficients in polar diagrams If the measured quantity is a complex reflection coefficient (S etc.), then the cen- ter of the polar diagram corresponds to a perfect load Z at the input test port of the DUT (no reflection, matched input).
  • Page 111 ® Concepts and Features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Screen Elements ● Points with the same reactance produce arcs. The following example shows a Smith chart with a marker used to display the stimulus value, the complex impedance Z = R + j X and the equivalent inductance L. Smith chart construction In a Smith chart, the impedance plane is reshaped so that the area with positive resist- ance is mapped into a unit circle.
  • Page 112 ® Concepts and Features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Screen Elements dinates in the normalized impedance plane and in the reflection coefficient plane are related as follows (see also: definition of matched-circuit (converted) impedances): = (1 + Γ) / (1 – Γ) Z / Z From this equation, it is easy to relate the real and imaginary components of the com- plex resistance to the real and imaginary parts of Γ: ...
  • Page 113 ® Concepts and Features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Screen Elements In a diagram, the grid lines overlaid to a "Smith" trace correspond to points of equal conductance G and susceptance B: ● Points with the same conductance are located on circles. ● Points with the same susceptance produce arcs.
  • Page 114 ® Concepts and Features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Screen Elements ● The upper and lower half of the diagram correspond to negative (inductive) and positive (capacitive) susceptive components of the admittance, respectively. Example: Reflection coefficients in the inverted Smith chart If the measured quantity is a complex reflection coefficient G (e.g. S ), then the unit inverted Smith chart can be used to read the normalized admittance of the DUT.

  • Page 115: Measurement Results

    ® Concepts and Features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Measurement Results 5.2.3.3 Measured Quantities and Trace Formats The analyzer allows any combination of a display format and a measured quantity. The following rules can help to avoid inappropriate formats and find the format that is ide- ally suited to the measurement task.

  • Page 116: S-Parameters

    ® Concepts and Features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Measurement Results 5.3.1 S-Parameters S-parameters are the basic measured quantities of a network analyzer. They describe how the DUT modifies a signal that is transmitted or reflected in forward or reverse direction. For a 2-port measurement, the signal flow is as follows. The figure above is sufficient for the definition of S-parameters but does not necessa- rily show the complete signal flow.
  • Page 117 ® Concepts and Features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Measurement Results Meaning of squared amplitudes The squared amplitudes of the incident and outgoing waves and of the matrix elements have a simple meaning: Table 5-3: Squared S-parameters Available incident power (= the power provided by a generator with a source impedance equal to the reference impedance Z ) at DUT port i=1,2...
  • Page 118 ® Concepts and Features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Measurement Results ● The receivers and generators can be freely assigned, but without reusing the same (original) physical port in different (redefined) ports. ● Redefining physical ports causes a reset and deletes all switch matrix RF connec- tions This can be used to insert external components (e.g.

  • Page 119: Reference Impedances

    ® Concepts and Features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Measurement Results 5.3.2 Reference Impedances Changing the reference impedances of the analyzer ports is often referred to as renormalization of port impedances. Renormalization means that the measurement results measured at 50 Ω (75 Ω) are converted into results at arbitrary port impedance. ●...

  • Page 120: Impedance Parameters

    ® Concepts and Features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Measurement Results           with the unit matrix E and two additional matrices with the elements       2. Power waves In the model of Kurokawa ("Power Waves and the Scattering Matrix"), the wave quantities a and b are transformed as follows: ...
  • Page 121 ® Concepts and Features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Measurement Results The extension of the impedances to more ports and mixed mode measurements is analogous to S-parameters. Z is the differential mode input impedance at port 4 of a dd44 DUT that is terminated at its other ports with the reference impedance Z Converted Admittances are defined as the inverse of the converted impedances.
  • Page 122 ® Concepts and Features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Measurement Results The calculation formula of a converted serial transmission impedance Z depends on the waveguide circuit theory according to which Reference Impedances are calculated. Table 5-5: Calculation of Converted Series Transmission Impedances Traveling Waves Power Waves Parallel Transmission Impedance A two-port transmission parameter Z...
  • Page 123 ® Concepts and Features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Measurement Results The R&S ZNB/ZNBT uses S (i≠j) to calculate the DUT impedance using the formula: 5.3.3.2 Z-Parameters The Z-parameters describe the impedances of a DUT with open output ports (impe- dance = 0). The analyzer provides the full set of Z-parameters including the transfer impedances (i.e.

  • Page 124: Admittance Parameters

    ® Concepts and Features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Measurement Results ● is the forward transfer impedance, defined as the ratio of the voltage V to the current I (forward measurement with open output, I = 0). ● is the reverse transfer impedance, defined as the ratio of the voltage V to the current I (reverse measurement with open input, I...

  • Page 125: Wave Quantities And Ratios

    ® Concepts and Features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Measurement Results The four 2-port Y-parameters can be interpreted as follows: ● is the input admittance, defined as the ratio of the current I to the voltage V measured at port 1 (forward measurement with output terminated in a short circuit, = 0).
  • Page 126 ® Concepts and Features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Measurement Results Examples for using wave quantities The wave quantities provide the power at the different receive ports of the analyzer. This is different from an S-parameter measurement, where the absolute power of a lin- ear device is canceled.
  • Page 127 ® Concepts and Features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Measurement Results Examples: ● "b Src Port 1" is the ratio of the outgoing wave at DUT port 2 and the incident wave at DUT port 1 (i.e. DUT port 1 ist stimulated). This corresponds to the forward transmission coefficient S ●...

  • Page 128: Unbalance-Balance Conversion

    ® Concepts and Features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Measurement Results Combining different detectors The detector setting in the More Ratios menu applies to both the numerator and the denominator wave quantity. To allow for different detector settings, measure the numer- ator and denominator wave quantities individually and use trace functions to calculate the ratio.
  • Page 129 ® Concepts and Features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Measurement Results ● The measurement is not impaired by the non-ideal characteristics of the balun (e.g. error tolerances, limited frequency range). ● Calibration can be performed at the DUT's ports. If necessary (e.g. to compensate for the effect of a test fixture), it is possible to shift the calibration plane using length offset parameters.
  • Page 130 ® Concepts and Features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Measurement Results ence impedances for the differential and common mode at each balanced port. Both steps can be done in a single "Balanced Ports" dialog. The most commonly used bal- anced port configurations and impedances are predefined and can be selected in the "S-Parameter Wizard".
  • Page 131 ® Concepts and Features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Measurement Results If <mout> is different from <min>, the S-parameters are called mode conversion fac- tors. Mixed Mode Parameters for Different Test Setups Which types of mixed mode parameter are available depends on the measured device and the port configuration of the analyzer.
  • Page 132 ® Concepts and Features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Measurement Results common-mode rejection ratio (CMRR). It can be calculated as |S |/|S | (see dd21 cc21 Chapter 5.3.6.2, "Mixed Mode Parameters", on page 130). The general definition of the complex CMRR between two ports (at least one of them balanced) is given below. Imbalance and common-mode rejection ratio can only be measured if more than 2 test ports are available on the VNA and connected switch...

  • Page 133: Stability Factors

    ® Concepts and Features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Measurement Results 5.3.7 Stability Factors The stability factors K, μ1 and μ2 are real functions of the (complex) S-parameters, defined as follows:             ...

  • Page 134: Operations On Traces

    ® Concepts and Features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Operations on Traces f = frequency in Hz In practice, the analyzer calculates an approximation to the derivative of the phase response, taking a small frequency interval Δf and determining the corresponding phase change ΔΦ. The delay is thus computed as: ...
  • Page 135 ® Concepts and Features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Operations on Traces A limit check consists of comparing the measurement results to the limit lines and dis- play a pass/fail indication. An acoustic warning and a TTL signal at the USER PORT on the rear panel (for test automation) can be generated in addition if a limit is violated. Upper and lower limit lines are both defined as a combination of segments with a linear or logarithmic dependence between the measured quantity and the sweep variable (stimulus variable).
  • Page 136 ® Concepts and Features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Operations on Traces When the sweep axis is changed from linear frequency sweep to logarithmic sweeps, straight limit lines are transformed into exponential curves. The sweep points are redis- tributed along the x-axis, so the number of failed points can change. Logarithmic interpolation The analyzer offers a logarithmic interpolation mode that allows you to carry over the limit line definition to logarithmic sweeps.
  • Page 137 ® Concepts and Features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Operations on Traces 5.4.1.2 Rules for Ripple Test Definition The analyzer places few restrictions on the definition of ripple limit ranges. The following rules ensure a maximum of flexibility: ● Ranges do not have to be sorted in ascending or descending order (e.g. the "Start Stimulus"...
  • Page 138 ® Concepts and Features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Operations on Traces The limit line rules for logarithmic sweeps and segmented frequency sweeps with point-based x-axis also apply to ripple limit lines (see Chapter 5.4.1.1, "Rules for Limit Line Definition", on page 135). 5.4.1.3 Circle Limits A circle limit is a special type of upper limit line which is defined by its center coordi-...
  • Page 139 ® Concepts and Features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Operations on Traces ● With a circle limit line centered on the left border of an inverted Smith diagram (Y = infinity), you can check whether the imaginary part of the admittance (Im(Y), sus- ceptance) falls below a limit.
  • Page 140 ® Concepts and Features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Operations on Traces 5.4.1.4 File Format for Limit Lines The analyzer uses a simple ASCII format to export limit line data. By default, the limit line file has the extension *.limit and is stored in the directory shown in the "Save Limit Line"...

  • Page 141: Trace Files

    ® Concepts and Features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Operations on Traces Compatibility with other instruments The VNAs of the R&S ZNx and R&S ZVx families use the same file format. Limit line files can be interchanged without restriction. 5.4.1.5 File Format for Ripple Limits The analyzer uses a simple ASCII format to export ripple limits.
  • Page 142 ® Concepts and Features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Operations on Traces When exporting traces to a file, it is recommended to set the analyzer to single sweep mode (CHANNEL – [SWEEP] > "Sweep Control" > "All Channels on Hold"). This ensures that a complete sweep is exported. 5.4.2.1 Touchstone Files Touchstone files contain a header, a comment section, and the actual trace data:...
  • Page 143 ® Concepts and Features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Operations on Traces can be replaced by an any S-parameter, so the *.s1p format is suitable for export- ing an arbitrary data trace representing an S-parameter. 2-port files (*.s2p) ! freq[Hz] re:S11 im:S11 re:S21 im:S21 re:S12 im:S12...
  • Page 144 ® Concepts and Features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Operations on Traces The following restrictions apply to this export type: – the reference resistance of the Touchstone option line is fixed to 50 Ω - regard- less of the reference impedance setting of the involved port –...
  • Page 145 ® Concepts and Features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Operations on Traces Example: Renormalization comments !The following Port Impedance Renormalization has been used when saving the data. !PortZ Port1:50+j0 Port2:70+j0 !Note: The Port Impedances differ from the reference impedance of this file. While reading the file the reference impedance value of the option line above is always used.

  • Page 146: Memory-Mapped Trace Data Transfer

    ® Concepts and Features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Operations on Traces arator" in the "Export ... Data" dialogs. A semicolon is inserted before the end of each line. The stimulus values are arranged in ascending order. 5.4.2.3 Finding the Best File Format The file format depends on how you want to use the exported data.
  • Page 147 ® Concepts and Features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Operations on Traces Set up a shared memory buffer The setup of a shared memory buffer and the allocation of trace data is performed by a sequence of SYSTem:DATA:MEMory... commands, starting with an INITialize and finished by a COMMit.

  • Page 148: Calibration

    ® Concepts and Features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Calibration 5.5 Calibration Calibration or system error correction is the process of eliminating systematic, reprodu- cible errors from the measurement results (S-parameters and derived quantities; see Chapter 5.1.5, "Data Flow", on page 90). The process involves the following stages: 1.

  • Page 149: Calibration Types

    ® Concepts and Features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Calibration Cal Off label A label "Cal Off" appears in the trace line if the system error correction no longer applies to the trace: This can happen for one of the following reasons: ● The sweep range is outside the calibrated frequency range.
  • Page 150 ® Concepts and Features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Calibration Table 5-7: Overview of calibration types Calibration Type Standards Parameters Error Terms General Accuracy Application Reflection Normali- Open or Short for Port i Reflection tracking Low to medium Reflection measure- zation ments on any port. Transmission Nor- Through for port pair (i,j), i...
  • Page 151 ® Concepts and Features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Calibration Calibration Type Standards Parameters Error Terms General Accuracy Application Reflect (equal at Reflection tracking, High Reflection and both ports), Match, transmission mea- (n-port) Source match, surements, espe- Through (between Directivity, cially in test fixtures. all port pairs) Load match, Transmission track-...
  • Page 152 ® Concepts and Features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Calibration ● Manual reflection normalizations offer Complementary Match Standard Measure- ments ● Manual transmission normalizations support Complementary Isolation Measure- ment (optional). Complementary Match Standard Measurements For reflection normalizations, the mandatory Open or Short measurements can be complemented by optional Match measurements.
  • Page 153 ® Concepts and Features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Calibration A one-path two-port calibration is also the best calibration method for test setups with unidirectional signal flow. 5.5.1.4 TOSM and UOSM Calibration TOSM A TOSM (Through – Open – Short – Match) calibration requires the same standards as the one path two ports calibration, however, all measurements are performed in the for- ward and reverse direction.
  • Page 154 ® Concepts and Features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Calibration UOSM: TOSM with unknown Through The analyzer can perform a TOSM calibration with any 2-port network serving as through connection, as long as it fulfills the reciprocity condition S . The modified TOSM calibration is referred to as UOSM (Unknown through – Open – Short – Match) calibration.
  • Page 155 ® Concepts and Features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Calibration Figure 5-7: Adapter Removal vs. UOSM The obtained adapter characteristics are mathematically removed from the obtained error coefficients. Uncertainties arising from a non-ideal characterization of the unknown through almost cancel, whereas they add up in the UOSM technique. As a consequence, Adapter Removal will provide more accurate results.
  • Page 156 ® Concepts and Features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Calibration ● Adapter Removal is not defined for more than 2 ports. However, with "Multiple Cali- brations per Channel" enabled, multiple (disjoint) port pairs can be calibrated using Adapter Removal. ● Currently Adapter Removal is not supported with Automatic Calibration.
  • Page 157 ® Concepts and Features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Calibration TRL with several lines and with TRM The system of equations solved to derive the error terms is such that singularities occur whenever the length difference ΔL between the Through and the Line is an inte- ger multiple of half of the wave length: ...
  • Page 158 ® Concepts and Features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Calibration Example: TRL calibration with two and three Lines If several Lines with different lengths are measured, the analyzer automatically divides the calibrated range into segments. The calibration data of the longest line is applied to the lowest segment, the calibration data of the shortest line to the highest segment.
  • Page 159 ® Concepts and Features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Calibration where l denotes the electrical length of the longest of the used Line standards, l long the length of the Through. The analyzer assumes l << l and calculates f long (18*l ). At frequencies below f , TRL calibration is automatically replaced by TRM, long if the necessary calibration data has been acquired.

  • Page 160: Calibration Standards And Calibration Kits

    ® Concepts and Features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Calibration If an external switch matrix is configured and you want to calibrate three or more test ports that are all on the same submatrix, then an extra Through measurement is required: Complement the minimum set of n-1 Throughs (as explained above) by an additional Through at a port pair that is connected by a "chain of throughs"...
  • Page 161 ® Concepts and Features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Calibration The standards are grouped into several types (Open, Through, Match,...) correspond- ing to the different input quantities for the analyzer's error models. The standard type also determines the equivalent circuit model used to describe its properties. The circuit model depends on several parameters that are stored in the cal kit file associated with the calibration kit.
  • Page 162 ® Concepts and Features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Calibration Offset parameters The offset parameters have the following physical meaning: ● The delay is the propagation time of a wave traveling through the standard. The electrical length is equal to the delay times the speed of light in the vacuum. It is a measure for the length of transmission line between the standard and the actual calibration plane.
  • Page 163 ® Concepts and Features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Calibration Offset parameters and standard types Offset parameters are used to describe all types of standards except the Sliding Match and the Attenuation. ● The Sliding Match is a one-port standard with variable load parameters (sliding load) and unspecified length.
  • Page 164 ® Concepts and Features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Calibration Calibration kits can be obtained as network analyzer accessories; refer to the data sheet for the relevant ordering information. The name of all parameter sets is equal to the name of the corresponding calibration kit model. Ideal parameters All ideal kits contain the standards listed below.
  • Page 165 ® Concepts and Features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Calibration Figure 5-8: Sliding Match: GUI representation A calibration is valid (and can be applied to the calibrated channel) if either the Match or three positions of the Sliding Match have been measured. However, it is often desir- able to acquire calibration data from both standards.
  • Page 166 ® Concepts and Features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Calibration By default cal kit files are stored in the C:\Users\Public\Documents\Rohde-Schwarz\Vna\Calibration directory. ● To export cal kit data, the analyzer uses a specific binary file format *.calkit. ● Three different import file formats are supported: R&S ZVA-specific binary cal kit files (*.calkit), R&S ZVR-specific binary cal kit files (*.ck), cal kit files in Agi- lent-specific ASCII formats (*.csv, *.prn).

  • Page 167: Calibration Pool

    ® Concepts and Features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Calibration 5.5.3 Calibration Pool The calibration "Pool" is a collection of correction data sets (cal groups) that the ana- lyzer stores in a common directory C:\Users\Public\Documents\Rohde-Schwarz\Vna\Calibration\Data. Cal groups in the pool can be applied to different channels and recall sets. Each cal group is stored in a separate file named <CalGroup_name>.cal.
  • Page 168 ® Concepts and Features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Calibration Advantages of automatic calibration Automatic calibration is faster and more secure than manual calibration, because: ● There is no need to connect several standards manually. The number of connec- tions to be performed quickly increases with the number of ports. ●...
  • Page 169 ® Concepts and Features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Calibration 5.5.5.1 Connecting the Calibration Unit The calibration units provide the following connectors: ● USB type B connector at the rear, which is used to power-supply and control the unit. A USB cable for connection to the network analyzer is provided with the cali- bration unit.
  • Page 170 ® Concepts and Features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Calibration 5.5.5.2 Performing an Automatic Calibration After connection and initialization of the calibration unit, perform the automatic calibra- tion of the related test ports using the "Calibration Unit" wizard (CHANNEL – [CAL] > "Start Cal" > "Start... (Cal Unit)"; see Chapter 6.11.1.3, "Calibration Unit Wizard", on page 418).
  • Page 171 ® Concepts and Features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Calibration ● (n – 1) one path two port calibrations for n calibrated ports (all possible 2-port com- binations from the "Node Port" to any other port). The node port is the source port for each one path two port calibration (fully calibrated port).
  • Page 172 ® Concepts and Features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Calibration Calibration type Characterization data required Refl Norm Open OSM CalPort 1, OSM CalPort2 ... (all calibrated ports) Refl Norm Short Refl OSM UOSM TOSM Trans Norm Both OSM CalPort 1, OSM CalPort2 ... (all calibrated ports), Through (between all pairs of ports) Trans Norm Forward One Path Two Ports...
  • Page 173 ® Concepts and Features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Calibration Calibration Minimal solution Default solution (minimal) type Full One Port Each calibrated test port must appear in exactly one Subdivide the n test ports into port assignment. groups of m ports with increasing port numbers.

  • Page 174: Scalar Power Calibration

    ® Concepts and Features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Calibration Test Port Assignment 1 Assignment 2 Assignment 3 Cal Unit Port 3 Cal Unit Port 4 Cal Unit Port 2 Cal Unit Port 3 Cal Unit Port 4 Cal Unit Port 2 Cal Unit Port 3 Table 5-12: Full n-port: Line-shaped optimum solution Test Port Assignment 1...
  • Page 175 ® Concepts and Features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Calibration Table 5-13: Recommended calibration methods for various measurements Measurement System error correction Scalar Power calibration SMARTerCal S-parameter meas. on linear Not necessary Not necessary DUTs S-parameter meas. on non-lin- Not possible ear DUTs -->...
  • Page 176 ® Concepts and Features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Calibration in the signal path between the source and the calibration plane. It is possible to intro- duce an arbitrary attenuation or gain into the signal path so that the cal power is not restricted to the power range of the source.
  • Page 177 ® Concepts and Features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Calibration After the source power calibration, one can expect the power at the calibration plane to be within the range of uncertainty of the power meter. The reference receiver reading corresponds to the calibrated source power. After a change of the sweep points or sweep range, the analyzer interpolates or extrapolates the calibration data;...
  • Page 178 ® Concepts and Features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Calibration ment receiver calibration. After a change of the sweep points or sweep range, the ana- lyzer interpolates or extrapolates the calibration data. 5.5.6.3 Power Calibration Labels Power calibration labels in the trace list for wave quantities and ratios inform you about the status and type of the current scalar power calibration.
  • Page 179 ® Concepts and Features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Calibration Interpolation and extrapolation The analyzer can interpolate and extrapolate power correction data so that a source or receiver power calibration can be reused after a change of the frequency sweep range: ● At new sweep points within the calibrated sweep range, interpolation is applied to calculate the correction data.

  • Page 180: Smartercal

    ® Concepts and Features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Calibration B: Two-port at power meter (during calibration) Test and measurement procedure: 1. Perform the calibration with the additional two-port between the analyzer port and the power sensor. During the calibration, the analyzer increases the power sensor values by the 2-port transmission coefficients to move the calibration plane of the power calibration towards the input of the DUT.
  • Page 181 ® Concepts and Features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Calibration For an overview of measurements and recommended calibration methods refer to Table 5-13. 5.5.7.1 Calibration Procedure A SMARTerCal is a fully menu-guided process which is performed like a regular sys- tem error correction. The calibration wizard defines the calibrated ports and the calibra- tion type;...

  • Page 182: Parallel Calibration Of Multiple Channels

    ® Concepts and Features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Calibration obtain definite source power levels, you can combine the SMARTerCal with an addi- tional scalar source power calibration. The scalar source power calibration and the SMARTerCal can be performed in any order. As a result of the combined calibration, the R&S ZNB/ZNBT measures vector error-corrected S-parameters;...

  • Page 183: Offset Parameters And De-/Embedding

    ® Concepts and Features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Offset Parameters and De-/Embedding The R&S ZNB/ZNBT offers multiple possibilities to calibrate several channels in paral- lel: ● Calibrate multiple channels in one go, using the same calibration type on the same ports for all channels In this case, for each port to be calibrated the same calibration standards have to be connected.
  • Page 184 ® Concepts and Features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Offset Parameters and De-/Embedding calibration plane. For a line with permittivity ε and mechanical length L the delay mech and the electrical length are calculated as follows: mech Delay Electrical Length mech In the CHANNEL – [OFFSET EMBED] > "Offset" softtool tab, "Delay","Electrical Length"...
  • Page 185 ® Concepts and Features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Offset Parameters and De-/Embedding Length and delay measurement, related settings "Auto Length" is suited for length and delay measurements on transmission lines. 1. Connect a (non-dispersive) cable to a single analyzer port no. n and measure the reflection factor S 2.
  • Page 186 ® Concepts and Features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Offset Parameters and De-/Embedding Auto Length for logical ports The "Auto Length" function can be used for balanced port configurations as well. If the active test port is a logical port, then the same length offset must be assigned to both physical ports that are combined to form the logical port.
  • Page 187 ® Concepts and Features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Offset Parameters and De-/Embedding ● The DC loss c is zero except for wave quantities and for S-parameters and ratios with maximum dB magnitude larger than –0.01 dB. ● "Auto Length and Loss" for a wave quantity centers the corrected dB magnitude as close as possible around 0 dBm.
  • Page 188 ® Concepts and Features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Offset Parameters and De-/Embedding "Direct Compensation" provides a frequency-dependent transmission factor. The phase of the transmission factor is calculated from the square root of the measured reflection factor, assuming a reciprocal test fixture. The sign ambiguity of this calcula- ted transmission factor is resolved by a comparison with the phase obtained in an Auto Length calculation.

  • Page 189: Embedding And Deembedding

    ® Concepts and Features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Offset Parameters and De-/Embedding To account for the propagation in both directions, the phase shift of a reflection param- eter due to a given length offset is twice the phase shift of a transmission parameter. If, at a frequency of 300 MHz, the electrical length is increased by 250 mm (λ/4), then the phase of S increases by 90 deg, whereas the phase of S...
  • Page 190 ® Concepts and Features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Offset Parameters and De-/Embedding 5.6.2.1 Embedding a DUT To be integrated in application circuits, high-impedance components like Surface Acoustic Wave (SAW) filters are often combined with a matching network. To obtain the characteristics of a component with an added matching network, both must be inte- grated in the measurement circuit of the network analyzer.
  • Page 191 ® Concepts and Features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Offset Parameters and De-/Embedding ● Calibration can be performed at the DUT's ports. If necessary, (e.g. for compensat- ing for the effect of a test fixture) it is possible to shift the calibration plane using length offset parameters.
  • Page 192 ® Concepts and Features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Offset Parameters and De-/Embedding The following networks are composed of a serial capacitance C or inductance L (as seen from the test port), followed by a shunt L or C. They are named Serial C, Shunt L / Serial L, Shunt C / Serial C, Shunt C / Serial L, Shunt L.
  • Page 193 ® Concepts and Features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Offset Parameters and De-/Embedding 5.6.2.4 Circuit Models for 4-Port Networks The lumped element 4-port transformation networks for (de-)embedding consist of the following two basic circuit blocks: ● A capacitor C connected in parallel with a resistor. ●...
  • Page 194 ® Concepts and Features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Offset Parameters and De-/Embedding The following networks are composed of two serial Cs or Ls (as seen from the analyzer test port), followed by a shunt C or L. They are named Serial Cs, Shunt L / Serial Ls, Shunt C / Serial Cs, Shunt C / Serial Ls, Shunt L.
  • Page 195 ® Concepts and Features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Offset Parameters and De-/Embedding The two port pair (de-)embedding networks in the figure below are based on port pairs 1, 2 and 1, 3 with appropriate sets of 4-port S-parameters. The R&S ZNB/ZNBT FW handles Port Pair De-/Embedding as a special case of Port De-/Embedding.
  • Page 196 ® Concepts and Features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Offset Parameters and De-/Embedding Network Analyzer Embedding Network 2m-1 Figure 5-9: Port Set De-/Embedding As shown in section Combining Several De-/Embedding Networks, port set deembed- ding is calculated after single-ended deembedding, and the port set embedding step precedes single ended embedding.
  • Page 197 ® Concepts and Features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Offset Parameters and De-/Embedding ● For port pairs (i.e. for m=2), the de-/embedding network can be defined either via lumped element model (possibly in combination with s2p Touchstone files) or via a s4p Touchstone file, see Chapter 5.6.2.5, "Port Pair De-/Embedding", on page 194.
  • Page 198 ® Concepts and Features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Offset Parameters and De-/Embedding Differential Matching Network Balun In contrast to standard balanced embedding (4-port), the matching circuit is only applied to the differential mode port (2-port). It can be specified via a Touchstone s2p file or by parametrizing a lumped "Shunt L, Shunt C"...
  • Page 199 ® Concepts and Features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Offset Parameters and De-/Embedding Fixture Modeling Process For all supported tools, the fixture modeling proceeds as follows: 1. Perform a calibration to the fixture connectors. 2. Measure one or more PCB test coupons for the related fixture. The results are independent of a particular DUT.
  • Page 200 ® Concepts and Features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Offset Parameters and De-/Embedding Test Coupons for Lead-ins Test Coupons for Lead-outs 2x Through 2x Through 1x Open 1x Short 1x Open 1x Short Figure 5-11: Test Coupons (balanced) Test Coupons for Lead-ins Test Coupons for Lead-outs 2x Through 2x Through 1x Open...
  • Page 201 ® Concepts and Features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Offset Parameters and De-/Embedding Figure 5-13: De-/Embedding calculation flow This means that the real networks are removed before virtual networks are added. The (de-)embedding steps are carried out in the following order: 1. Single Ended Deembedding: every physical port can be deembedded from a single 2-port network 2.

  • Page 202: Optional Extensions And Accessories

    ® Concepts and Features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Optional Extensions and Accessories 2. Single ended deembedding 3. Balanced port deembedding 4. Balanced port embedding 5. Single ended port embedding 5.7 Optional Extensions and Accessories The instrument can be upgraded with various software and hardware options, provid- ing enhanced flexibility and an extended measurement functionality.

  • Page 203: Additional Test Ports (R&S Znbt Only)

    ® Concepts and Features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Optional Extensions and Accessories 5.7.1 Additional Test Ports (R&S ZNBT only) Various Options The R&S ZNBT8 is available with a minimum of 4 test ports (order number 1318.7006.24) that are either equipped with standard or with Extended Dynamic Range reflectometers (option ZNBT8-B504).
  • Page 204 ® Concepts and Features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Optional Extensions and Accessories Time domain transforms can be calculated in band pass or low pass mode. For the lat- ter, the analyzer offers the impulse and step response as two alternative transformation types. A wide selection of windows can be used to optimize the time domain response and suppress side lobes due to the finite sweep range.
  • Page 205 ® Concepts and Features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Optional Extensions and Accessories Table 5-19: Comparison of band pass and low pass modes Transform Band pass Low pass type Advantages Easiest to use: works with any set of equi- Higher response resolution (doubled) distant sweep points Includes information about DC value Real result...
  • Page 206 ® Concepts and Features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Optional Extensions and Accessories Table 5-20: Properties of frequency windows Window Side lobe sup- Relative impulse Best for... pression width No Profiling (Rect- 13 dB – angle) Low First Side lobe 43 dB Response resolution: separation of (Hamming) closely spaced responses with compara- ble amplitude...
  • Page 207 ® Concepts and Features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Optional Extensions and Accessories is sufficiently above the f , the entire set of sweep points is shifted towards lower frequencies so that the stop frequency is decreased. If the start frequency of the sweep is close to f , then the sweep points can have to be shifted towards higher frequencies.
  • Page 208 ® Concepts and Features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Optional Extensions and Accessories With default analyzer settings, the differences between the grid types are small. The following table helps you find the appropriate grid. Table 5-21: Properties of grid types Grid type: Keep Sweep Time Unambig-...
  • Page 209 ® Concepts and Features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Optional Extensions and Accessories The analyzer uses fixed "No Profiling (Rectangle)" window settings to transform the measured trace into time domain. The TD trace is gated using the selected time gate. The gated trace is transformed back into frequency domain using a "No Profiling (Rect- angle)"...
  • Page 210 ® Concepts and Features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Optional Extensions and Accessories blue arrow = direct signal red and green arrows = reflected signal TD S Calculation VSWR The ANSI time-domain method relies on a complex transmission measurement (S using a vector network analyzer (VNA). A time-domain transformation of the frequency domain data shows the impulse response between the two antennas.
  • Page 211 ® Concepts and Features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Optional Extensions and Accessories TD S measurement in accordance with ANSI C63.25 require a R&S ZNB20, VSWR R&S ZNB40 or R&S ZNBT20. 5.7.2.7 Extended Time Domain Analysis Option R&S ZNB-K20 / R&S ZNBT-K20 Option K20 extends the basic Time Domain representation capabilities of option K2 by signal integrity testing functionality in the time domain.
  • Page 212 ® Concepts and Features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Optional Extensions and Accessories The measurement proceeds as follows: 1. The analyzer performs a frequency sweep. 2. The impulse response is calculated based on the results of the preceding fre- quency sweep. 3. With the impulse response calculated in step a) the eye diagram is simulated.
  • Page 213 ® Concepts and Features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Optional Extensions and Accessories ● Eye Width This result indicates the effects of jitter in reducing the horizontal eye opening. It is defined as "Bit Period" - 2 · 3 · "Jitter RMS". ● Bit Period The inverse of the data rate.
  • Page 214 ® Concepts and Features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Optional Extensions and Accessories Eye mask tests are only available for NRZ modulated signals. Rise Time Measurement From the measured S parameters, the step responses can also be calculated using the inverse Fourier transform. The rise time is the time the step response takes to rise from x% to y% (0≤x≤y≤100) of the resulting step size, typically from 10% to 90%.

  • Page 215: Distance To Fault Measurements

    ® Concepts and Features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Optional Extensions and Accessories The Automatic Harmonic Grid from the option R&S ZNB/ZNBT-K2 "Time domain Analysis" is used to ease setting up the frequency grid for all measurements provided by the option R&S ZNB/ZNBT-K20. 5.7.3 Distance to Fault Measurements Option R&S ZNB-K3 / R&S ZNBT-K3 With option K3 "Distance-to-Fault", the R&S ZNB/ZNBT can locate faults and disconti-...
  • Page 216 ® Concepts and Features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Optional Extensions and Accessories Adjust the frequency sweep to the length of the transmission line and the expected dis- tance to fault: ● The maximum distance that can be measured is proportional to the number of sweep points.

  • Page 217: Frequency Conversion Measurements

    ® Concepts and Features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Optional Extensions and Accessories The distance to fault measurement of option R&S ZNB-K3/R&S ZNBT-K3 is currently restricted to port 2. A more flexible approach with additional configuration possibilities is available with time domain option R&S ZNB-K2 / R&S ZNBT-K2 (see Chapter 5.7.2, "Time Domain Analysis",...
  • Page 218 ® Concepts and Features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Optional Extensions and Accessories Independent source powers for Port 1 and Gen1 can be configured in addition, if so desired. Arbitrary Power Configuration Arbitrary power configuration is also part of option R&S ZNB/ZNBT-K4. Internal Second Source If an internal second source is available, the mixer measurements outlined above (and many other measurements) can be performed without an additional external generator;...
  • Page 219 ® Concepts and Features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Optional Extensions and Accessories Meaning of S-parameters The frequency-converting property of the mixer (i.e. the fact that incident and transmit- ted waves are at different frequencies) causes a loss of phase information. While a scalar measurement is active, the reverse transmission parameter S is unavailable;...
  • Page 220 ® Concepts and Features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Optional Extensions and Accessories A standard mixer measurement with a single mixer stage and no frequency multipliers corresponds to the figure above with the second mixer and LO 2 omitted and m = 1. Mixer Diagrams The mixer signal diagrams show the parameters of the mixer input signals (RF, LO) and of the mixing product (IF signal, output).
  • Page 221 ® Concepts and Features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Optional Extensions and Accessories – LO signals (1 or 2, from below): Signal source (analyzer port or external gener- ator), fixed power and frequency (or frequency sweep range, if the RF signal is at fixed frequency), frequency conversion settings. –...
  • Page 222 ® Concepts and Features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Optional Extensions and Accessories 5.7.4.3 Intermodulation Measurements Option R&S ZNB/ZNBT-K14 The intermodulation measurement requires option R&S ZNB/ZNBT-K14 and, as a pre- requisite, the Frequency Conversion Measurements option R&S ZNB/ZNBT-K4. The "Intermodulation Wizard" facilitates the measurement configuration and the selec- tion of results (see Chapter 6.12.4, "Intermod.
  • Page 223 ® Concepts and Features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Optional Extensions and Accessories The lower tone signal is generated at port 1, the upper tone is provided by the external generator. Both signals are combined externally and fed to the DUT input. The intermo- dulation quantities can be measured at the DUT output (transmitted wave b2).
  • Page 224 ® Concepts and Features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Optional Extensions and Accessories Lower Tone Upper Tone Intermodulation Measurement Results The intermodulation measurement provides two different types of results: ● In the swept measurement, the analyzer performs a frequency or power sweep of the two-tone stimulus signal and displays the selected intermodulation quantities as a function of the lower-tone frequency or power.
  • Page 225 ® Concepts and Features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Optional Extensions and Accessories ● In the intermodulation spectrum measurement ("CW Mode Spectrum"), the fre- quency and power of the lower and upper tones is kept constant. The analyzer dis- plays all intermodulation products near the signals up to a selectable order. User Manual 1173.9163.02 ─...

  • Page 226: Receiver Bandwidth 10 Mhz

    ® Concepts and Features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Optional Extensions and Accessories Intermodulation Quantities A nonlinear DUT that is supplied with a two-tone signal with the lower/upper frequen- cies f and f causes emissions at frequencies which correspond to sums and differen- ces of the upper and lower tone frequencies and their integer multiples: –...

  • Page 227: Frequency Resolution 1 Mhz

    ® Concepts and Features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Optional Extensions and Accessories 5.7.6 Frequency Resolution 1 mHz Option R&S ZNB/ZNBT-K19 This software option improves the frequency resolution of a R&S ZNB/ZNBT to 1 mHz. 5.7.7 Bias Tees (R&S ZNB only) Option R&S ZNB-B1 for R&S ZNB4|8 The hardware option R&S ZNB-B1 provides additional BNC inputs (labeled BIAS 1, 2,...), which can be used to apply an external DC voltage (bias) to the analyzer ports: ●...

  • Page 228: Precision Frequency Reference

    ® Concepts and Features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Optional Extensions and Accessories Limitations ● With two internal sources the physical VNA ports are split into groups P1 and P2 such that source 1 can only drive ports in P1 and source 2 can only drive ports in –...

  • Page 229: Device Control

    ® Concepts and Features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Optional Extensions and Accessories 5.7.11 Device Control Option R&S ZNB/ZNBT-B12 This option provides a PCIe and a Direct Control interface, both intended to control external devices. ● The PCIe interface is suitable for certain Rohde & Schwarz Signal Generators. ●...
  • Page 230 ® Concepts and Features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Optional Extensions and Accessories ing to the MIPI® Alliance "System Power Management Interface Specification" and 10 General Purpose Input/Output (GPIO) pins. RFFE command execution and GPIO volt- age settings can be synchronized with the sweep (sweep sequencer functionality); however, RFFE read is not supported in sweep sequencer mode.

  • Page 231: Additional Removable System Drive

    ® Concepts and Features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Optional Extensions and Accessories ble shunt resistances. The firmware takes 500 samples per millisecond (and pin) and calculates the average voltages/currents over the configured measurement time. RFFE Cable with adapters (R&S ZN-Z25) A 2m ribbon cable for connecting a DUT to the RFFE GPIO interface – along with a set of adapters –...

  • Page 232: Extended Dynamic Range

    ® Concepts and Features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Optional Extensions and Accessories Analyzer Option Minimum source power R&S ZNBT8|20, ports 9 to 12 R&S ZNBT8|20-B23 R&S ZNBT8|20, ports 13 to 16 R&S ZNBT8|20-B24 R&S ZNBT8|20, ports 17 to 20 R&S ZNBT8|20-B25 R&S ZNBT8|20, ports 21 to 24 R&S ZNBT8|20-B26 R&S ZNBT20|26|40, ports 1 to 4 R&S ZNBT20|26|40-B21...

  • Page 233: Receiver Step Attenuators

    ® Concepts and Features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Optional Extensions and Accessories ● Extended Dynamic Range options are not available for R&S ZNB20 and R&S ZNB40. ● Extended Dynamic Range and Receiver Step Attenuators are mutually exclusive ● Extended Dynamic Range and Bias Tees are mutually exclusive ●...

  • Page 234: Dc Inputs

    ® Concepts and Features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Optional Extensions and Accessories Table 5-24: R&S ZNB Analyzer type Port 1 Port 2 Port 3 Port 4 R&S ZNB4 R&S ZNB4-B31 R&S ZNB4-B32 R&S ZNB4-B33 R&S ZNB4-B33 R&S ZNB8 R&S ZNB8-B31 R&S ZNB8-B32 R&S ZNB8-B33 R&S ZNB8-B33 ●...
  • Page 235 ® Concepts and Features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Optional Extensions and Accessories DC power measurement The DC power P supplied to the DUT can be measured using one or two of the four DC inputs DC INPUT 1...4 at the rear panel (option R&S ZVBx-B81). The Power Added Efficiency dialog suggests different measurement types involving different test setups.
  • Page 236 ® Concepts and Features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Optional Extensions and Accessories Table 5-26: PAE measurement types Measurement type / Input parameters / Circuit diagram Description Constant voltage source The DC power supply provides a constant voltage U ; a precision resistor R is connec- ted in series to the DUT.

  • Page 237: Usb-To-Iec/Ieee Adapter

    ® Concepts and Features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Optional Extensions and Accessories 5.7.19 USB-to-IEC/IEEE Adapter R&S ZVAB-B44 Hardware option R&S ZVAB-B44 (order no. 1302.5544.03) comprises an adapter and driver software for controlling external devices via IEEE 488 / IEC 625 (GPIB). The driver software is installed on the network analyzer.
  • Page 238 ® Concepts and Features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Optional Extensions and Accessories USB ports Control connection From VNA (e.g. USB) source port Power meter / sensor Power calibration plane External power meters must be configured with their connection type and device address before they are available as additional receivers (SYSTEM – [SETUP] > "External Devices"...

  • Page 239: External Generators

    ® Concepts and Features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Optional Extensions and Accessories 5.7.21 External Generators The connection of an external generator to the R&S ZNB/ZNBT can serve different purposes. ● Extended measurement functionality: Each external generator represents an addi- tional source port. External generators increase the number of RF input signals for the DUT.
  • Page 240 ® Concepts and Features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Optional Extensions and Accessories USB ports Control connection (e.g. USB) External generator External generators must be configured in the SYSTEM – [SETUP] softtool before they are available as additional sources. Configured generators appear in many control ele- ments of the R&S ZNB/ZNBT, e.g.

  • Page 241: External Switch Matrices

    ® Concepts and Features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Optional Extensions and Accessories ● Use another device as master: Set the analyzer to "External" frequency reference and synchronize it (and all other devices) to the master's reference clock signal, fed in at the REF IN connector on the analyzer's rear panel. Fast sweep mode and conditions In list mode the external generator steps through a predefined list of frequencies or sig- nal powers.
  • Page 242 ® Concepts and Features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Optional Extensions and Accessories analyzer (N'>N) without modifying the instrument itself. The increased number of test ports can reduce or even eliminate the manual reconnections of the DUT, resulting in a higher measurement speed, reliability and repeatability. The firmware of the R&S ZNB/ZNBT is able to control switch matrices from Rohde &...
  • Page 243 ® Concepts and Features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Optional Extensions and Accessories unit without extensions). For each stimulus port, 5 sweeps are required to measure the resulting b-waves, 6·5 = 30 sweeps in total. For "real" 6-port analyzers (such as the R&S ZNBT8), a single sweep per driving port would be sufficient.
  • Page 244 ® Concepts and Features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Optional Extensions and Accessories ● certain matrix test ports may not be available for measurements ● certain transmission measurements may not be possible Example: The 4x24 extension of switch matrix R&S ZN-Z84 consists of 2 separate 2x12 subma- trices, where matrix VNA ports of the "left"...
  • Page 245 ® Concepts and Features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Optional Extensions and Accessories Basically the same argument holds true for variant 16 of switch matrix ZV-Z82, which consists of 4 separate 1x4 submatrices and that allows "inter-" but no "intra-submatrix" transmission measurements. ZV-Z82-16 Figure 5-22: ZV-Z82-16: limited connectivity 5.7.22.4 Multiple Paths: Precision vs.
  • Page 246 ® Concepts and Features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Optional Extensions and Accessories Priority 1 Routes Priority 2 Routes Figure 5-23: ZV-Z81 Routes and priorities Example: For an R&S ZN-Z8x, each route traverses exactly one of the equipped 2x6 modules. The overall route quality is determined by the number of solid state switches traversed on this 2x6 module: 2x6 Module Priority 1 Routes...
  • Page 247 ® Concepts and Features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Optional Extensions and Accessories For every supported switch matrix, the available routes are prioritized according to the number of switches they traverse (the rectangles in Figure 5-23). ● To obtain highest measurement precision, the driving port should always use the "best possible"...
  • Page 248 ® Concepts and Features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Optional Extensions and Accessories 2-port VNA Route 1 Route 2 ● 4 paths per transmission measurement for an N-port VNA with N≥4 4-port VNA Route Route Route Route This kind of "multipath calibration" offers the following additional benefit: During manual calibration, the measured reflection/transmission coefficients are pre- sented as memory traces - one per path.

  • Page 249: Gui Reference

    ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Function Keys and Softtools 6 GUI Reference This chapter describes the Graphical User Interface (GUI) of the analyzer. The most convenient way to access the GUI functions is via Softtools. Hence the GUI reference is structured accordingly. The softtools, in turn, can be opened via the keys on the front panel of the analyzer, via the on-screen Hardkey Panel...
  • Page 250 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Function Keys and Softtools Table 6-1: Function keys and softtools (Virtual) Hardkey Keyboard Shortcut Related Softtool Action TRACE – [MEAS] Alt + Shift + A Meas Softtool default TRACE – [FORMAT] Alt + Shift + B Format Softtool default TRACE –...

  • Page 251: Meas Softtool

    ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Meas Softtool (Virtual) Hardkey Keyboard Shortcut Related Softtool Action CHANNEL – [OFF- Alt + Shift + Q Offset Embed Softtool default SET EMBED] SYSTEM – [FILE] Ctrl + O File Softtool default SYSTEM – [PRINT] Ctrl + P "File"...

  • Page 252: S-Params Tab

    ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Meas Softtool 6.2.1 S-Params Tab Selects S-parameters as measured quantities. S-parameters are the basic measured quantities of a network analyzer. They describe how the DUT modifies a signal that is transmitted or reflected in forward or reverse direction. S-parameters (and derived quantities such as Y- and Z-parameters) fully characterize a linear DUT.
  • Page 253 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Meas Softtool CALCulate<Ch>:PARameter:SDEFine CALCulate<Ch>:PARameter:SDEFine:SENDed S<out><in> Selects one of the four elements of the standard 2-port S-parameters as a measured quantity for the active trace. Remote command: CALCulate<Ch>:PARameter:MEASure "<Trace_Name>", "S11" | "S12" | "S21" | "S22" CALCulate<Ch>:PARameter:SDEFine "<Trace_Name>", "S11"...
  • Page 254 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Meas Softtool ted channel (see "Fixture Simulator" on page 506), the "Balanced Ports..." button is inactive (grayed out). 6.2.1.2 S-Parameter Wizard The "S-Parameter Wizard" guides you through the setup of a standard multi-port S- parameter measurement in a frequency sweep. This dialog is not available for R&S ZNBT, or if a switch matrix is configured.
  • Page 255 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Meas Softtool Tip: The default reference impedance of the physical analyzer ports is Z = 50 Ω. The default reference impedances for balanced ports are derived hereof. You do not need to change this value unless you want to renormalize the port impedances; Chapter 5.3.2, "Reference Impedances", on page 119.
  • Page 256 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Meas Softtool Instrument reset To obtain a predictable result, the measurement wizard has to reset all settings except the current calibration data. Store your recall set if you do not want to lose the current configuration.
  • Page 257 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Meas Softtool The port configurations are arranged in the list to the right. The resulting port assign- ment is shown on the left-hand side of the "Predefined Config" tab. ● For a single-ended port, the diagram shows a single line between the physical test port and the logical port.
  • Page 258 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Meas Softtool ● To define a balanced port, select two physical ports and tap "Balanced". ● To dissolve balanced ports, select them and tap "Single". ● To exclude logical ports from the measurement, select them and tap "Unused". ●...
  • Page 259 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Meas Softtool Furthermore, provides functions for renumbering the logical ports. Remote command: SOURce<Ch>:LPORt<LogPt> SOURce<Ch>:LPORt<LogPt>:CLEar Reference Impedance Tab The "Reference Impedance" tab of the "Balanced Ports" dialog allows you to define (or redefine) the impedances of the logical ports. Background information Refer to Chapter 5.3.2, "Reference...
  • Page 260 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Meas Softtool By default, the reference impedance of a physical port is set to the reference impe- dance of the connector type assigned to the port. However, it can be defined as an arbitrary complex value (renormalization of port impedances). By changing the refer- ence impedance, it is possible to convert the measured values at 50 Ω...

  • Page 261: Ratios Tab

    ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Meas Softtool Renormalization According to Theory of Selects the waveguide circuit theory for renormalization. The conversion formulas of these theories only differ if the reference impedance of at least one test port has a non- zero imaginary part.
  • Page 262 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Meas Softtool The predefined wave quantities can all be obtained with the same test setup, where a 2-port DUT is connected between the analyzer ports 1 and 2. The stimulus signal is provided by the analyzer port 1 or 2 ("Source Port"). The predefined wave quantities correspond to the 2-port S-parameters: ●...
  • Page 263 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Meas Softtool The notation for ratios follows the usual scheme of the vector network analyzer: ● The a-waves are the outgoing/transmitted waves at the analyzer's test ports. ● The b-waves are the incoming/measured waves. ● The source port for the stimulus signal must be specified in addition.

  • Page 264: Wave Tab

    ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Meas Softtool Remote command: CALCulate<Ch>:PARameter:MEASure "<Trace_Name>", "<Ratio>" CALCulate<Ch>:PARameter:SDEFine "<Trace_Name>", "<Ratio>" Detector Selects the algorithm that is used to calculate the results points from the raw measure- ment data. For details refer to Chapter 5.3.5.3, "Detector Settings", on page 127.
  • Page 265 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Meas Softtool ● "a1 Source Port 1" is the wave transmitted at physical port 1. In a standard S- parameter measurement, this wave is fed to the input port (port 1) of the DUT (for- ward measurement).
  • Page 266 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Meas Softtool The notation for wave quantities follows the usual scheme of the vector network ana- lyzer: ● The a-waves are the outgoing/transmitted waves at the analyzer's test ports. ● The b-waves are the incoming/measured waves. ●...

  • Page 267: Intermod. Tab

    ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Meas Softtool Show as Selects the physical unit of the displayed trace. It is possible to display the measured "Voltage" V or to convert it into a power value P according to the formula P = V / Re(Z denotes the reference impedance of the source port (for wave quantities a ) or of...
  • Page 268 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Meas Softtool 6.2.4.1 Controls on the Intermod. Tab The following buttons in the "Intermod." tab open associated dialogs: ● "More IM Products...": see Chapter 6.2.4.2, "IM Products Dialog", on page 269 ● "More Intercept...": see Chapter 6.2.4.3, "Intercept Points Dialog", on page 270...
  • Page 269 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Meas Softtool ● "Lower Tone at DUT In", "Lower Tone at DUT Out", "Upper Tone at DUT In", and "Upper Tone at DUT Out" are measurements of the two fundamental waves of the intermodulation measurement. ●...
  • Page 270 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Meas Softtool "Upper" The "Upper" intermodulation products are measured at frequencies above the upper tone. "Lower" The "Lower" intermodulation products are measured at frequencies below the lower tone. Remote command: CALCulate<Ch>:PARameter:MEASure CALCulate<Ch>:PARameter:SDEFine Relative If "Relative" is selected, the intermodulation product is displayed in dB units relative to the measured lower tone level at the DUT output ("Lower Tone at DUT Out").

  • Page 271: Z←Sij Tab

    ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Meas Softtool Side Defines the position of the intercept point relative to the lower and upper tones. "Major" Denotes the lower or upper intercept point, whichever is smaller. The "Major" intercept point reveals the worst-case performance of the DUT.
  • Page 272 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Meas Softtool Z←S<out><in> selector Selects a converted impedance parameter as a measured quantity for the active trace. For an n-port vector network analyzer, the pull-down list provides the full set of n impedance parameters. Converted impedance parameters are expressed as Z←S , where <out>...

  • Page 273: Y←Sij Tab

    ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Meas Softtool 6.2.6 Y←Sij Tab Selects converted admittances as measured quantities. The admittances are calcula- ted from the measured S-parameters. Background information Refer to the following sections: ● Chapter 5.3.4, "Admittance Parameters", on page 124 ●...

  • Page 274: Y-Z-Params Tab

    ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Meas Softtool Use the Smith chart to obtain an alternative, graphical representation of the converted impedances in a reflection measurement. Tip: Use the "Y- Z-Params" tab to measure Y-parameters including the transfer param- eters. Remote command: CALCulate<Ch>:PARameter:MEASure "<Trace_Name>", "Y-S11"...
  • Page 275 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Meas Softtool Y- and Z-parameters are expressed as Y/Z , where <out> and <in> denote the <out>< in> output and input port numbers of the DUT. Remote command: CALCulate<Ch>:PARameter:MEASure "<Trace_Name>", "Y11" | "Z11" ... CALCulate<Ch>:PARameter:SDEFine "<Trace_Name>", "Y11"...

  • Page 276: Imbal. Cmrr Tab

    ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Meas Softtool Remote command: CALCulate<Ch>:PARameter:MEASure "<Trace_Name>", "Z11" | "Z12" | "Z21" | "Z22" CALCulate<Ch>:PARameter:SDEFine "<Trace_Name>", "Z11" | "Z12" | "Z21" | "Z22" Balanced Ports... Opens a dialog to define a balanced port configuration. Balanced Ports Dialog.
  • Page 277 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Meas Softtool ● "Balanced Ports...": see Chapter 6.2.1.3, "Balanced Ports Dialog", on page 256 Imbalance/CMRR Selects an imbalance or CMRR parameter as a measured quantity for the active trace. These parameters are expressed as "Imb "...
  • Page 278 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Meas Softtool This dialog can only be opened, if a balanced and two single-ended logical ports are configured in the Balanced Ports Dialog. ● The Logical Port on the left represents the balanced test port: any (active) bal- anced logical port can be selected ●...

  • Page 279: Stability Tab

    ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Meas Softtool 6.2.9 Stability Tab Selects one of the three two port stability factors K, μ or μ as measured quantities. A typical application of stability factors is to assess the stability of an amplifier. Stability factors cannot be calculated in balanced port configurations.

  • Page 280: Power Sensor Tab

    ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Meas Softtool Balanced Ports... Opens a dialog to define a balanced port configuration. Chapter 6.2.1.3, "Balanced Ports Dialog", on page 256. 6.2.10 Power Sensor Tab Allows you to set up and perform measurements using external power sensors. The standard test setup for a "Power Sensor"...

  • Page 281: Dc Tab

    ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Meas Softtool Show as Selects the physical unit of the displayed trace. It is possible to display the measured "Voltage" V or convert it to a "Power" according to the formula P = V /Re(Z denotes the reference impedance of the source port.
  • Page 282 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Meas Softtool Remote command: CALCulate<Ch>:PARameter:MEASure "<Trace_Name>", "DC1d1" | "DC2d1" | ... CALCulate<Ch>:PARameter:SDEFine "<Trace_Name>", "DC1d1" | "DC2d1" | ... Ranges "DC 1", ..., "DC 4" in the "Ranges" section configure the measurement ranges of DC INPUT 1, ..., 4, respectively. For best accuracy, adjust the ranges to the measured sig- nals.
  • Page 283 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Meas Softtool A PAE measurement involves the following steps: 1. Select the "Measurement Type", according to the properties of your DC power source. 2. Enter the parameters for the selected measurement type. 3. Establish the test setup (including the RF connections of the DUT and the DC INPUT connections) as shown in the circuit diagram.

  • Page 284: Format Softtool

    ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Format Softtool Range DC Select the DC range of each DC INPUT connector in use according to the (estimated) input voltage range; see "DC 1/DC 2/DC 3/DC 4/Source Port" on page 281. Remote command: [SENSe<Ch>:]DC<DCInp>:RANGe 6.3 Format Softtool The "Format"...
  • Page 285 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Format Softtool dB Mag Selects a Cartesian diagram with a dB scale of the vertical axis to display the magni- tude of the complex measured quantity. Properties: The stimulus variable appears on the horizontal axis, scaled linearly. The magnitude of the complex quantity C, i.e.
  • Page 286 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Format Softtool Remote command: CALCulate<Chn>:FORMat SMITh Polar Selects a polar diagram to display a complex quantity, primarily an S-parameter or ratio. Properties: The polar diagram shows the measured data (response values) in the complex plane with a horizontal real axis and a vertical imaginary axis. The magnitude of a complex value is determined by its distance from the center, its phase is given by the angle from the positive horizontal axis.
  • Page 287 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Format Softtool Unwr Phase Selects a Cartesian diagram with an arbitrarily scaled linear vertical axis to display the phase of the measured quantity. Properties: The stimulus variable appears on the horizontal axis, scaled linearly. The phase of the complex quantity C, i.e.
  • Page 288 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Format Softtool Tip (alternative formats): It is possible to view the magnitude and phase of a complex quantity instead of the real and imaginary part. The magnitude can be displayed on a linear scale or on a logarithmic scale. Both the real and imaginary parts are displayed in the polar diagram.
  • Page 289 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Format Softtool Application: Transmission measurements, especially with the purpose of investigating deviations from linear phase response and phase distortions. To obtain the delay, a fre- quency sweep must be active. Tip: The cables between the analyzer test ports and the DUT introduce an unwanted delay, which often can be assumed to be constant.

  • Page 290: Scale Softtool

    ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Scale Softtool With n sweep steps the delay at sweep point no. m is calculated as follows: ● If n is even (n = 2k), then Δf (m) = f (m+k) – f (m–k) and ΔΦ(m) = ΔΦ (m+k) – ΔΦ (m–k).
  • Page 291 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Scale Softtool The "Scale Values" settings are closely related to the "Format" and "Display" settings. The "Scale Values" settings depend on the current trace format (diagram type) because not all diagrams can be scaled in the same way: ●...
  • Page 292 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Scale Softtool Auto Scale Trace Adjusts the "Scale/Div" and the "Ref Value" to display the entire active trace in the dia- gram area, leaving an appropriate display margin. ● In Cartesian diagrams, the analyzer recalculates the values of the vertical divisions so that the trace fits onto approx.

  • Page 293: Scale Coupling Tab

    ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Scale Softtool ● In circular diagrams ("Polar", "Smith", "Inv Smith"), "Ref Value" defines the value of the outer circumference. Changing "Ref Value" enlarges or scales down the dia- gram, leaving the center unchanged. The unit is U (units) for all circular diagrams. Remote command: DISPlay[:WINDow<Wnd>]:TRACe<WndTr>:Y[:SCALe]:RLEVel Ref Pos...

  • Page 294: Zoom Tab

    ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Scale Softtool The "Trace Manager..." button opens the Trace Manager Dialog. Couple All Traces / Couple Trc ... To Trace Applies the scale settings of the reference trace ("To Trace") to all traces / to the active trace.
  • Page 295 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Scale Softtool Alternatives to Zooming There are several alternatives to graphical/numerical zooming. Refer to the following sections: ● Chapter 4.3.6, "Scaling Diagrams", on page 66 ● Chapter 6.4.1, "Scale Values Tab", on page 290 ● Chapter 6.8.1, "Stimulus Tab", on page 384...

  • Page 296: Trace Config Softtool

    ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Trace Config Softtool Remote command: DISPlay[:WINDow<Wnd>]:TRACe<WndTr>:ZOOM[:STATe] Zoom Reset If a graphical zoom has been applied to the current diagram, this action resets the zoom area. Remote command: DISPlay[:WINDow<Wnd>]:TRACe<WndTr>:ZOOM[:STATe] Overview On If a graphical zoom has been applied to the active diagram (and has not been reset, this button toggles the overview for this diagram.
  • Page 297 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Trace Config Softtool In remote control, each channel can contain an active trace. The active remote traces and the active manual trace are independent of each other; see Chapter 7.3.2, "Active Traces in Remote Control", on page 727.
  • Page 298 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Trace Config Softtool Remote command: CALCulate<Ch>:PARameter:SDEFine DISPlay[:WINDow<Wnd>]:TRACe<WndTr>:FEED Add Tr+Diag Creates a trace in the active channel and assigns it to a new diagram. Otherwise behaves like Trace. Remote command: CALCulate<Ch>:PARameter:SDEFine DISPlay[:WINDow<Wnd>][:STATe] DISPlay[:WINDow<Wnd>]:TRACe<WndTr>:FEED Delete Trace Deletes the active trace and removes it from the diagram area. If the active diagram contains only one trace, the diagram is also deleted.
  • Page 299 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Trace Config Softtool 6.5.1.2 New Trace Dialog The "Trc+" tool bar button allows you to create a trace in the active channel. ● Tap/click the "Trc+" button to duplicate the active trace (equivalent to Trace). ●...
  • Page 300 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Trace Config Softtool ● "Label" indicates and controls the visibility of the related trace label ● "Meas" indicates the measured parameter. ● "Type" indicates whether the trace is a data trace ("DAT"), displaying the current measurement data, or a memory trace ("MEM").

  • Page 301: Mem

    ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Trace Config Softtool This button is disabled if the recall set contains only one trace: In manual control, each recall set must contain at least one diagram area with one channel and one trace. Remote command: CALCulate<Ch>:PARameter:DELete Couple All Channels / Decouple All Channels ●...
  • Page 302 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Trace Config Softtool Coupling of data and memory traces When a memory trace is generated from a data trace, it is displayed in the same dia- gram area and inherits all channel and trace settings from the data trace. The memory trace displayed in the active diagram;...

  • Page 303: All Mem All Data Tab

    ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Trace Config Softtool Remote command: CALCulate<Chn>:MATH:MEMorize TRACe:COPY Data & Func to <Destination> Stores the current state of the active data trace – including trace functions – to the Destination memory trace. Trace functions The trace functions comprise the following mathematical operations: ●...
  • Page 304 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Trace Config Softtool Background information Refer to "Trace Types" on page 93. All Data to <Destination> Stores the current data of all data traces in the active recall set to memory traces, in accordance with the Destination setting.

  • Page 305: Math Tab

    ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Trace Config Softtool For each data trace, the current trace data are copied to a new memory trace, associated to this data trace. New memory traces are named "Mem<n>[<Data_Trace>]" with <n> selected by the analyzer firmware to make trace names unique. Remote command: Show All Data / Hide All Data / Show All Mem / Hide All Mem Displays or hides all data or memory traces in the active recall set.
  • Page 306 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Trace Config Softtool 6.5.4.1 Controls on the Math Tab The "Define Math..." buttons in the "Complex Data" and "Formatted Data" sections both open the User Def Math Dialog, but with different scope: ● "Complex Data" > "Define Math..." defines mathematical operations on raw com- plex trace data.
  • Page 307 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Trace Config Softtool "Trace Math" is enabled if the active data trace fulfills the conditions for evaluating the mathematical relation. E.g., if no "User Defined" mathematical relation is defined, a memory trace must be coupled to the active data trace, so that the R&S ZNB/ZNBT can evaluate one of the relations "Data / <Mem>"...
  • Page 308 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Trace Config Softtool Compatibility between traces in mathematical relations Mathematical traces are either constant functions or functions of one or more data or memory traces. They are calculated on a point-to-point basis. Each trace point no. i of the mathematical trace is calculated from a set of constant values c , ..., c plus the...
  • Page 309 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Trace Config Softtool Expression builder The mathematical expression appears in the upper part of the dialog. The operands and operators in the expression can be selected from a keyboard and the list of "Oper- ands": ●...
  • Page 310 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Trace Config Softtool ● In power sweeps, "StimVal" provides the voltage in V that results from the source power in dBm. To obtain the correct source power in dBm (for "dB Mag" trace for- mat), Result is Wave Quantity must be enabled.

  • Page 311: Time Domain Tab

    ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Trace Config Softtool Example: A mathematical trace value amounts to 1 (real value); the port impedance is 50 Ω. If "Result is Wave Quantity" is on, the analyzer assumes the trace value to be 1 V, which is converted into a linear power of 20 mW, corresponding to approx.
  • Page 312 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Trace Config Softtool "Low Pass Settings..." opens the Low Pass Settings Dialog. Time Domain Selects the time domain representation for the active diagram area. The softkey is enabled if a linear frequency sweep is active (see "Lin Freq"...
  • Page 313 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Trace Config Softtool Type Selects a band pass or low pass time domain transform. See Chapter 5.7.2.2, "Band Pass and Low Pass Mode", on page 204. To calculate a low pass transform, the sweep points must be on a harmonic grid. Oth- erwise the analyzer can only calculate an approximate result and generates a warning.
  • Page 314 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Trace Config Softtool TD-VSWR Enables time domain site VSWR measurements (see Chapter 5.7.2.6, "Time Domain Measurements", on page 209). VSWR Remote command: CALCulate:TDVSwr[:STATe] Gate Span Time Domain S Measurements relies on a time gate that is centered at the anten- VSWR na's direct response (plus ring-down time), separating the direct response from the indirect responses (reflections).
  • Page 315 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Trace Config Softtool Is the Current Grid Harmonic? The area at the top of the "Low Pass Settings" dialog indicates whether the current fre- quency grid is harmonic. Remote command: [SENSe<Ch>:]HARMonic? Set Harmonic Grid and Keep The three buttons provide alternative algorithms for calculation of a harmonic grid, based on the current sweep points.

  • Page 316: Time Gate Tab

    ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Trace Config Softtool ● If the properties of the DUT at f = 0 are sufficiently well known, then it is recom- mendable to enter the DC value manually ("Manual Entry"). Examples: At f = 0 the reflection factor of an open-ended cable is 1. It is –1 for a short-circuited cable and 0 for a cable with matched termination.
  • Page 317 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Trace Config Softtool Time Gate Enables or disables the time gate for the time domain and frequency domain traces. "Gat" is displayed in the trace list while the time gate is active. Remote command: CALCulate<Chn>:FILTer[:GATE]:TIME:STATe Axis Pair "Start Stop"...

  • Page 318: Distance To Fault Tab

    ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Trace Config Softtool ● A "Notch" filter rejects all information in the specified time region and passes every- thing else. Remote command: CALCulate<Chn>:FILTer[:GATE]:TIME[:TYPE] Shape Selects a gate shape which the R&S ZNB/ZNBT uses to filter the trace in the time domain.
  • Page 319 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Trace Config Softtool 6.5.7.1 Controls on the Distance to Fault Tab The "Distance to Fault" tab provides controls that allow to enable and configure a stan- dard Distance to Fault (DtF) measurement. A standard DtF measurement is prepared in the order from top to bottom: 1.
  • Page 320 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Trace Config Softtool ● proposes a reflection normalization on port 2 (see "Start Cal Unit... (P2) Refl OSM / Start Cal... (P2) Refl OSM" on page 322) ● enables the Fault Limit Check Fault Limit controls ●...
  • Page 321 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Trace Config Softtool The required number of points depends on: ● the frequency span Δf = f – f (see "Start Frequency / Stop Frequency / Center stop start Frequency / Span Frequency" on page 385), ●...
  • Page 322 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Trace Config Softtool Start Cal Unit... (P2) Refl OSM / Start Cal... (P2) Refl OSM Sets up and runs the "Calibration Unit"/"Calibration Setting" wizard to perform a full one-port calibration at physical port 2 (only port 2 enabled and calibration type "Refl OSM"...
  • Page 323 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Trace Config Softtool ● When the "Fault Limit" is modified, the new "Fault Limit" replaces other limit lines (see Chapter 6.6.1.2, "Define Limit Lines Dialog", on page 348) ● This field is only enabled, if Fault Limit Check is active.
  • Page 324 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Trace Config Softtool Access: Available Cable Types... Dialog > "Attenuation" column > ... Given the specified attenuation values the R&S ZNB/ZNBT calculates the attenuation factor at the center of the channel's sweep range and corrects the impulse response trace using this attenuation factor Attenuation (f center The frequency dependence can be defined in two alternative ways:...
  • Page 325 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Trace Config Softtool Remote command: MMEMory:LOAD:CABLe 6.5.7.3 Fault List Dock Widget The "Fault List" dock widget allows you to explore and save all peaks that violate the active Fault Limit. Access: [Trace] > "Distance to Fault" > "Fault List..." Figure 6-3: Fault List Dock Widget Fault Table The displays a list of all peaks that violate the active...

  • Page 326: Trace Statistics Tab

    ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Trace Config Softtool Export to File... ← Contents Opens a dialog that allows to export the (filtered) content of the fault list to an ASCII file with configurable "Field Separator" and "Decimal Separator". This CSV type file contains one line (terminated by CR+LF) per fault. With ";" as "Field Separator"...
  • Page 327 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Trace Config Softtool 6.5.8.1 Controls on the Trace Statistics Tab The "Evaluation Range..." button opens the "Evaluation Range" dialog (see Chap- ter 6.5.8.2, "Evaluation Range Dialog", on page 331). The "Decimal Places..." button opens the "System Config" dialog to define the (maxi- mum) number of fractional digits for setting values and measurement results.
  • Page 328 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Trace Config Softtool    i 1 Note: To calculate the "Min", "Max", "Pk-Pk" and the "Std Dev" values, the analyzer uses formatted response values y (see trace formats). Consequently, the mean value and the standard deviation of a trace depend on the selected trace format. In contrast, the "RMS"...
  • Page 329 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Trace Config Softtool ● "El Len" is the electrical length, which is the product of the phase delay times the speed of light in the vacuum. If no dispersion occurs, the phase delay is equal to the group delay. For more informa- tion, refer to Chapter 5.3.8, "Delay, Aperture, Electrical Length",...
  • Page 330 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Trace Config Softtool The compression point is a measure for the upper edge of the linearity range of a DUT. It is close to the highest input signal level for which the DUT shows a linear response, so that the magnitude of all S-parameters remains constant).
  • Page 331 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Trace Config Softtool Remote command: CALCulate<Chn>:STATistics:NLINear:COMP:REFerence Selected Marker This button is only visible if "Selected Marker" is used as Reference Value. It allows you to select the marker whose value shall be used as the reference ("small signal value") for the compression point calculation.

  • Page 332: Smooth Shift Hold Tab

    ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Trace Config Softtool See also Chapter 6.5.8, "Trace Statistics Tab", on page 326 and Chapter 6.7, "Marker Softtool", on page 362. Evaluation Range Selects a predefined evaluation range. Up to 10 different ranges are available for each recall set.
  • Page 333 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Trace Config Softtool ● The analyzer can export the raw complex (unformatted) data or formatted data. The unformatted data are independent of all "Smooth Shift Hold" settings; see "Formatted Values" on page 340. ● For complex traces, if marker format and trace format do not coincide, the marker values are calculated before Smoothing Hold...
  • Page 334 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Trace Config Softtool Aperture Defines how many trace values are averaged to smooth the trace if Smoothing switched on. ∈ {1, ..., N} is replaced by An "Aperture" of a % means that the value at sweep point n the arithmetic mean of the values at sweep points ⌈...
  • Page 335 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Trace Config Softtool Shift Trace Functions for shifting the active trace in horizontal and vertical direction. Stimulus ← Shift Trace Shifts the active trace in horizontal direction, leaving the positions of all markers unchanged. The unit of the offset value depends on the sweep type. Note: A "Stimulus"...

  • Page 336: Infinite Averaging Tab

    ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Trace Config Softtool "Real" Dyn_Shift(z) = z – Re(zr) "Imag" Dyn_Shift(z) = z – Im(zr) "Complex" Dyn_Shift(z) = z – zr Remote command: n.a. 6.5.10 Infinite Averaging Tab The controls on the "Infinite Averaging " tab allow you configure infinite averaging for the active trace.
  • Page 337 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Trace Config Softtool Background information Refer to Chapter 5.4.2, "Trace Files", on page 141. All buttons on the "Trace Data" tab serve as "openers" for related dialogs: ● "Import..." calls up a dialog to load a memory trace from a trace file; see Chap- ter 6.5.11.1, "Import Complex Data Dialog",...
  • Page 338 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Trace Config Softtool On loading data from a trace file with several traces, the analyzer displays a dialog to select one or more of the traces stored in the file (see Chapter 6.5.11.3, "Select Param- eter Dialog", on page 341).
  • Page 339 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Trace Config Softtool Data export can serve many purposes, e.g.: ● To process and evaluate measurement data in an external application. ● To store measurement data and reimport it in a future measurement session. Background information Refer to the following sections: ●...
  • Page 340 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Trace Config Softtool The "Export Data - <File Type>" dialog is a standard "Save File" dialog with a number of additional buttons to specify the export options. Many options depend on the selected export file format ("Files of type"). The displayed controls change accordingly. The export options are remembered when the dialog is closed.
  • Page 341 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Trace Config Softtool The exported complex trace values are the values at the beginning of the trace data flow. None of the following stages (trace mathematics, shift, time domain gate, trace formatting and smoothing) affects the exported data. "Save" writes the raw stimulus values (frequency/power/time, according to the sweep type) and the raw, complex measurement points to a file.
  • Page 342 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Trace Config Softtool Access: The dialog may be called from several dialogs, for example on pressing "Open" in the Import Complex Data Dialog. Select All / Deselect All During trace data import, selects/deselects all traces contained in the opened trace file. Auto Distribute Available for trace data import only.

  • Page 343: Lines Softtool

    ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Lines Softtool Checks and Messages in the Dialog After each port or channel selection, the R&S ZNB/ZNBT checks the channel data for compatibility with the trace export conditions. If data from "All Channels" are exported, every channel must contain a compatible set of traces;...

  • Page 344: Limit Test Tab

    ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Lines Softtool Background information Refer to Chapter 5.4.1, "Limit Check", on page 134. 6.6.1 Limit Test Tab Defines limit lines for the measurement results (upper and lower limits), visualizes them in the diagrams and activates/deactivates the limit check. Limit lines are available for all cartesian diagram types;...
  • Page 345 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Lines Softtool The limit line colors are defined in the Define User Color Scheme Dialog (SYSTEM > [DISPLAY] > "Config" > "Define User Color..."). You can choose between various options: ● Display upper and lower limit lines with different colors. ●...
  • Page 346 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Lines Softtool – If "Limit Check" is enabled, the limits are checked, no matter if the limit lines are displayed. – The limit check can even be enabled, if no limit lines are defined. In this case, the info field displays "No limit defined!"...
  • Page 347 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Lines Softtool ● "PASS" represents pass for all traces with enabled limit check. A trace without limit lines or with disabled individual limit check always passes the global check. ● "FAIL" means that the limit check for one or more traces failed. Remote command: CALCulate:CLIMits:FAIL? TTL1 Pass / TTL2 Pass...
  • Page 348 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Lines Softtool Shift Lines By setting the "Stimulus" and "Response" values it is possible to shift a previously defined limit line in x and y direction, respectively, without having to redefine the con- stituent line segments. Remote command: CALCulate<Chn>:LIMit:CONTrol:SHIFt CALCulate<Chn>:LIMit:UPPer:SHIFt...
  • Page 349 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Lines Softtool Creating limit lines with minimum effort Choose one of the following methods to create and handle limit lines efficiently: ● To define limit lines with only a few segments, select "Add" and edit each segment in the Segment List individually.
  • Page 350 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Lines Softtool Add / Insert / Delete / Delete All The first four buttons below the segment list extend or shorten the list. The analyzer places no restriction on the number of segments in a limit line. ●...
  • Page 351 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Lines Softtool ● "Import File..." opens a dialog to load a limit line from a trace file (see Chap- ter 6.5.11, "Trace Data Tab", on page 336). In case the selected file contains more than one trace, another popup dialog lets you select the adequate one: Imported traces are polygonal curves with n points and n –...

  • Page 352: Ripple Test Tab

    ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Lines Softtool For convenience, "Type", "Start Stimulus", "Stop Stimulus", and "Interpolation" are repeated from the Segment List of the "Define Limit Lines" dialog. Linear/Formula Allows you to decide how to define the line segment. ● "Linear": Define the line segment as a straight line, connecting the endpoints ("Start Stimulus","Start Response") and ("Stop Stimulus","Stop Response").
  • Page 353 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Lines Softtool 6.6.2.1 Controls on the Ripple Test Tab The "Def. Ripple Test..." button opens the "Define Ripple Test" dialog (see Chap- ter 6.6.2.2, "Define Ripple Test Dialog", on page 355). Show Ripple Limits Shows or hides the ripple limit lines associated with the active trace in a Cartesian dia- gram area.
  • Page 354 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Lines Softtool An acoustic signal (Ripple Fail Beep) and a TTL signal indicating pass or fail can be generated in addition. Note: ● Ripple check and display of limit lines are independent of each other: –...
  • Page 355 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Lines Softtool Remote command: CALCulate:RIPPle:DISPlay:RESult:ALL[:STATe] Clear Test Resets the limit check results. Remote command: CALCulate<Chn>:RIPPle:CLEar Global Check "Global Check" on page 346. TTL1 Pass / TTL2 Pass "TTL1 Pass / TTL2 Pass" on page 347. 6.6.2.2 Define Ripple Test Dialog The "Define Ripple Test"...
  • Page 356 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Lines Softtool The "Define Ripple Test" dialog contains a table to edit the individual ranges of the rip- ple check ranges. The buttons below the table extend, shorten, or reorder the range list and save/recall ripple test data. Range List Defines the individual ripple limit ranges.

  • Page 357: Circle Test Tab

    ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Lines Softtool Recall Ripple Test.../Save Ripple Test... The buttons open an Open/Save File dialog to load a ripple limit line from a ripple limit file or store the current ripple limit configuration to a file. Ripple limit files are ASCII files with the default extension *.ripple and a special file format.
  • Page 358 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Lines Softtool The limit line colors are defined in the "Define User Color Scheme" dialog (see Chap- ter 6.16.3.2, "Define User Color Scheme Dialog", on page 664). You can choose between various options: ● Assign the same color to traces and associated limit lines. ●...
  • Page 359 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Lines Softtool The appearance of the limit fail symbols is defined in the "Define User Color Scheme" dialog (see Chapter 6.16.3.2, "Define User Color Scheme Dialog", on page 664). You can choose between various options: ●...

  • Page 360: Display Circle Tab

    ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Lines Softtool Clear Test Resets the limit check results. Remote command: CALCulate<Chn>:LIMit:CIRCle:CLEar Draw Circle Activates touchscreen or mouse operation; tap the diagram at one border of the limit circle and draw the circle to the required size and position. Remote command: Radius / Center X / Center Y Defines the limit circle by its radius and its center on the X-axis and Y-axis.

  • Page 361: Horiz. Line Tab

    ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Lines Softtool Show Border If enabled, the border of the Display Circle is shown whenever the related trace is dis- played in complex format. The border color can be modified by a user-defined color scheme (Element "Vertical Range Lines").

  • Page 362: Marker Softtool

    ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Marker Softtool ● The controls on this tab are only active if the active trace is displayed in cartesian format. ● If another trace format is selected, the line (position) is deleted. Show Horiz. Line Displays or hides the horizontal line.
  • Page 363 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Marker Softtool "Add Marker" adds a new marker. Related information Refer to the following sections: ● Chapter 5.2.1.3, "Markers", on page 95 ● Chapter 4.3.4, "Handling Diagrams, Traces, and Markers", on page 58 Mkr <i> Stimulus / Ref Mkr Stimulus Gets/sets the stimulus value of the active marker.
  • Page 364 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Marker Softtool Remote command: CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>[:STATe] CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:REFerence[:STATe] All Off Disables all markers of the active trace. Markers remember their "Marker Props" while disabled (see Chapter 6.7.2, "Marker Props Tab", on page 365). The marker properties are definitely lost when the associ- ated trace is deleted.

  • Page 365: Marker Props Tab

    ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Marker Softtool Remote command: CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:REFerence[:STATe] CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:REFerence:Y Add Marker Adds a new marker to the active trace. Uses the next "free" marker number Coupled Markers Activates or deactivates Marker Coupling. The label indicates the selected Coupling Type: "Coupling Type"...
  • Page 366 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Marker Softtool Marker Name Assigns a (new) name to the active marker. Marker names can contain letters, num- bers, blanks and special characters. Remote command: CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:NAME CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:REFerence:NAME Marker Format Defines the formatting of the active marker in the movable marker info field. For background information on marker formats, see "Marker Format"...
  • Page 367 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Marker Softtool If in the current trace format the X axis represents the stimulus, the marker can be moved horizontally. Moving the marker adjusts the markers's stimulus value, but its response value remains fixed. Arbitrary: freezes the marker at the position determined by the current stimulus and response value.

  • Page 368: Marker Search Tab

    ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Marker Softtool Decimal Places... Opens the "User Interface" tab of the "System Config" dialog, which allows to define the (maximum) number of decimal digits for different units. See "User Interface Tab" on page 676. 6.7.3 Marker Search Tab Provides "Marker Search"...
  • Page 369 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Marker Softtool Remote command: CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:FUNCtion:EXECute MINimum | MAXimum CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:FUNCtion:RESult? Center = Marker "Center = Marker / Start = Marker / Stop = Marker / Span = Marker" on page 381. Next Peak Sets the active marker to the next local maximum or minimum in the search range, depending on the selected Peak Type.
  • Page 370 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Marker Softtool Define an adequate "Search Range" to restrict the search to the adequate frequency or power interval (see Chapter 6.7.3.2, "Search Range Dialog", on page 370). Note: Tracking for bandfilter search can be activated separately, see "Tracking"...
  • Page 371 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Marker Softtool "Search Range" properties The 10 search ranges are valid for the entire recall set. Each of them can be assigned to any marker in the recall set, irrespective of the trace and channel that the marker belongs to.
  • Page 372 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Marker Softtool ● TRACE – [MARKER] > "Multiple Peak" > "Marker Config..." Select Marker Allows you to select the related marker and to activate or deactivate it. Remote command: CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>[:STATe] Search Config Allows you to select the Target Search Mode of the selected marker.

  • Page 373: Multiple Peak Tab

    ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Marker Softtool 6.7.4 Multiple Peak Tab "Multiple Peak" search allows you to find multiple local minima/maxima at once. Background information Refer to "Basic Marker Search Functions" on page 100. 6.7.4.1 Controls on the Multiple Peak Tab Max / Min Sets up to 10 markers to the highest maxima or lowest minima in the configured Eval...
  • Page 374 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Marker Softtool All Markers Off "All Off" on page 364. 6.7.4.2 Multiple Marker Config Dialog The "Multiple Marker Config" dialog allows you to configure the multiple peak searches for the active trace. Access: TRACE – [MARKER] > "Multiple Peak" > "Marker Config..." Search Config Same as selecting Max /...

  • Page 375: Target Search Tab

    ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Marker Softtool 6.7.5 Target Search Tab The "Target Search" functions use markers to locate trace points with a specific response value ("Target Value"). The functions are unavailable if the active trace con- tains no markers (e.g. after "All Markers Off"). Some of the "Target Search"...

  • Page 376: Bandfilter Tab

    ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Marker Softtool Target Format Description Formula "Real" Real part of z Re(z) = x "Imag" Imaginary part of z Im(z) = y "SWR" (Voltage) Standing Wave Ratio SWR = (1 + |z|) / (1 – |z|) "Default"...
  • Page 377 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Marker Softtool Background information Refer to "Bandfilter Search" on page 101. Bandfilter for arbitrary scalar traces "Bandfilter" search can be used for a broad range of measured quantities (see Chap- ter 6.2, "Meas Softtool", on page 251). To obtain real filter parameters, the trace format must be "dB Mag", the measured quantity must be a transmission S-parameter and a frequency sweep must be performed.
  • Page 378 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Marker Softtool Remote command: CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:BWIDth Bandpass Ref to Max Activates the search for a bandpass region on the active trace and activates Tracking. The located bandpass region is the tallest peak in the search range with a minimum excursion as specified by the "Bandwidth"...
  • Page 379 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Marker Softtool Remote command: CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:FUNCtion:BWIDth:MODE BPASs CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:FUNCtion:EXECute BFILter CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer:SEARch:BFILter:RESult[:STATe]:AREA Bandpass Ref to Mkr Activates the search for a bandpass region on the active trace and activates Tracking, starting at the position of the active marker. A bandpass region is the closest peak in the evaluation range that has a minimum excursion as specified by the "Bandwidth"...
  • Page 380 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Marker Softtool Remote command: CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:FUNCtion:BWIDth:MODE BSTop CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:FUNCtion:EXECute BFILter Result Off Hides the movable info field with the results of a bandpass or a bandstop search and disables Tracking. The info field is displayed again (and tracking re-enabled) when a new "Bandfilter"...

  • Page 381: Set By Marker Tab

    ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Marker Softtool 6.7.7 Set by Marker Tab The "Set by Marker" functions use the active marker to define the sweep range, scale the diagram and introduce an electrical length offset. The functions are unavailable if the active trace contains no markers (e.g.

  • Page 382: Info Field Tab

    ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Marker Softtool Ref Val = Marker / Max = Marker / Min = Marker The following functions use the response value of the active marker to scale the y-axis of the diagram: ● "Ref Val = Marker" sets the reference value equal to the response value of the active marker, leaving the values of the vertical divisions ("Scale / Div") unchanged.

  • Page 383: Marker Coupling Tab

    ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Marker Softtool 6.7.9 Marker Coupling Tab Allows you to set up and control marker coupling. Background information Refer to "Marker Coupling" on page 99. Coupled Markers Activates or deactivates Marker Coupling. The label indicates the selected Coupling Type: "Coupling Type"...

  • Page 384: Stimulus Softtool

    ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Stimulus Softtool Remote command: CALCulate:MARKer:COUPled:TYPE Reset Marker Coupling Convenience function for disabling marker coupling and setting the Coupling Type "All" (default). Remote command: CALCulate:MARKer:COUPled[:STATe] OFF CALCulate:MARKer:COUPled:TYPE ALL 6.8 Stimulus Softtool On the "Stimulus" softtool, you can access to the stimulus parameters of the active channel.
  • Page 385 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Stimulus Softtool The following "Stimulus" settings are also available on the "Power" tab: ● Power ● Start Power / Stop Power Start Frequency / Stop Frequency / Center Frequency / Span Frequency Defines the sweep range for non-segmented frequency sweeps. For a Lin Freq sweep, setting "Start Frequency"...

  • Page 386: Power Tab

    ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Stimulus Softtool CW Frequency Sets the fixed frequency for Power, Mode, and Time sweeps. The "CW Frequency" is also used as the channel base frequency for frequency-con- verting measurements; see Chapter 5.7.4, "Frequency Conversion Measurements", on page 217.
  • Page 387 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Stimulus Softtool The setting has no effect for Power sweeps, where the source power is varied over a continuous range. Remote command: SOURce<Ch>:POWer<PhyPt>[:LEVel][:IMMediate][:AMPLitude] Start Power / Stop Power Defines the sweep range for Power sweeps. Remote command: SOURce<Ch>:POWer<PhyPt>:STARt SOURce<Ch>:POWer<PhyPt>:STOP...

  • Page 388: Time Domain X-Axis Tab

    ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Stimulus Softtool Tip: Switching off the internal RF sources while an external generator is used can improve the measurement accuracy. "RF Off All Channels" also deactivates external generators, so you have to use the settings in the "Arb Frequency" tab of the Port Set- tings Dialog (with option R&S ZNB/ZNBT-K4).
  • Page 389 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Stimulus Softtool "Time Start" and "Time Stop" or "Time Center" and "Time Span" are alternative set- tings. Remote command: CALCulate<Chn>:TRANsform:TIME:STARt CALCulate<Chn>:TRANsform:TIME:STOP CALCulate<Chn>:TRANsform:TIME:CENTer CALCulate<Chn>:TRANsform:TIME:SPAN Distance Start / Distance Stop / Distance Center / Distance Span Defines the display range for the time domain trace in distance representation (see "Time / Distance"...

  • Page 390: Power Bw Avg Softtool

    ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Power Bw Avg Softtool 6.9 Power Bw Avg Softtool The "Power Bw Avg" softtool allows you to configure the signal power, to set up the IF signal processing, and to configure the averaging logic. Access: CHANNEL – [PWR BW AVG] hardkey 6.9.1 Power Tab The "Power"...

  • Page 391: Average Tab

    ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Power Bw Avg Softtool Bandwidth "Bandwidth" the measurement bandwidth of the IF filter. Within the value range, the entered value is rounded up to 1 · 10 Hz, 1.5 · 10 Hz, 2 · 10 Hz, 3 ·...
  • Page 392 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Power Bw Avg Softtool Effects of sweep averaging, alternative settings An average over several sweeps reduces the influence of random effects in the mea- surement and therefore minimizes the noise level. The effect increases with the aver- age factor, however, obtaining an averaged result requires several sweeps and there- fore increases the measurement time.

  • Page 393: Sweep Softtool

    ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Sweep Softtool ● "Flatten Noise": Cumulative moving averages of the (linear) magnitude and phase values, provides the most effective noise suppression for the "dB Mag", "Phase", "Unwr. Phase", and "Lin Mag" formats. ● "Moving Average": Simple moving averages of the real and imaginary parts of each measurement result;...
  • Page 394 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Sweep Softtool Number of Points Sets the total number of measurement points per sweep. The minimum number of points is 1 (measurement at a single frequency/power/time value). The maximum depends on the analyzer type. Sets the total number of measurement points per sweep. The minimum number of points is 1 (measurement at a single frequency/power/time value), the maximum is 100,001.
  • Page 395 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Sweep Softtool "Freq Step Size" = ("Stop Frequency" – "Start Frequency") / ("Number of Points" – can be fulfilled. Changing the "Start Frequency" and "Stop Frequency" modifies the "Freq Step Size". ● If the sweep range is defined via "Center Frequency" and "Span Frequency", both the "Span Frequency"...

  • Page 396: Sweep Type Tab

    ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Sweep Softtool All Partial Meas'ments / First Partial Meas'ment Meas Delay is set to a value > 0, this setting allows you to define how the measure- ment delay is applied: ● If "All Partial Meas'ments" is selected, the delay time is added before each partial measurement.
  • Page 397 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Sweep Softtool 6.10.2.1 Controls on the Sweep Type Tab Lin Freq In a linear frequency sweep, the stimulus frequency is swept in equidistant steps over the continuous frequency range. The frequency range (sweep range) and the internal generator power can be specified in the "Stimulus"...
  • Page 398 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Sweep Softtool Log Freq In a "Log Freq" sweep, the stimulus frequency is swept on a logarithmic scale over the continuous frequency range. The frequency range (sweep range) and the internal gen- erator power can be specified in the "Stimulus" settings (see Chapter 6.8.1, "Stimulus Tab", on page 384).
  • Page 399 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Sweep Softtool Tip: You can change to point based x-axis to improve the display of a segmented fre- quency sweep (see "Seg X-Axis" on page 401). Remote command: on page 1203 SEGMent [SENSe<Ch>:]SWEep:TYPE Power In a "Power" sweep, the internal generator power is swept in dB-linear, equidistant steps over a continuous power range.
  • Page 400 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Sweep Softtool The measurement is triggered according to the current trigger settings (see Chap- ter 6.10.3, "Trigger Tab", on page 407). Each trigger event triggers the first partial measurement of a measurement point. The time interval between two consecutive measurements depends on the trigger settings and the sweep parameters (especially the number of points).
  • Page 401 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Sweep Softtool Tip: Sweep time The minimum sweep time depends on the number of measurement points, the mea- surement bandwidth, the delay time before each partial measurement and the number of partial measurements required for each measurement point. The analyzer estimates this time, based on the current measurement settings.
  • Page 402 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Sweep Softtool Tip: Overlapping limit line and ripple limit line segments are not displayed when a point-based x-axis is active; see Chapter 5.4.1.1, "Rules for Limit Line Definition", on page 135. Remote command: [SENSe<Ch>:]FREQuency:SEGMent:AXIS 6.10.2.2 Define Segments Dialog The "Define Segments"...
  • Page 403 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Sweep Softtool Controls in the Define Segments Dialog Table Columns The table in the upper part of the "Define Segments" dialog contains an automatically assigned current number for each segment plus the following editable or non-editable columns: ●...
  • Page 404 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Sweep Softtool Add / Insert / Delete / Delete All The four buttons below the segment list extend or shorten the list. ● "Add" adds a new segment to the end of the list. The added segment covers a possible frequency gap between the preceding seg- ment and the upper frequency limit of the analyzer.
  • Page 405 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Sweep Softtool The analyzer uses a simple ASCII format to export sweep segment data. By default, the sweep segment file extension is *.SegList. The file starts with two comment lines containing the version and a third line reproducing the header of the segment list. The following lines contain the entries of all columns of the segment list, including the "Displayed Columns"...
  • Page 406 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Sweep Softtool Optional Columns Each selected (checked) option adds a column to the segment list and the point list. ● "Name" allows you to assign a name to each segment. A segment name is a string that is allowed to contain letters, numbers and special characters.

  • Page 407: Trigger Tab

    ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Sweep Softtool ● "Time" defines the sweep time for each segment. The default configuration for a new segment is equal to the sweep time setting for unsegmented sweeps; see "Sweep Time / Auto" on page 395. When "Time"...
  • Page 408 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Sweep Softtool Trigger system of the analyzer The trigger system is used to synchronize the analyzer's actions with events that can be provided by an internal or external signal or user-generated ("Manual Trigger"). Trig- gered measurements are an alternative to the default mode ("FreeRun", "Continuous" sweep), where the measurement is continuously repeated without fixed time reference.
  • Page 409 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Sweep Softtool FreeRun / External / Manual / Multiple Triggers These four buttons select the trigger source: ● In "FreeRun" mode, a new measurement is started immediately without waiting for a trigger event and without fixed time reference. The remaining trigger settings are not valid.
  • Page 410 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Sweep Softtool ● "Point" means that each trigger event starts the measurement at the next sweep point. ● "Partial Measurement" means that each trigger event starts the next partial mea- surement at the current or at the next sweep point. If every sweep point only requires a single partial measurement, this option is equivalent to "Point".
  • Page 411 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Sweep Softtool analyzer is configured for "Multiple Triggers" (see "FreeRun / External / Manual / Multi- ple Triggers" on page 409). Access: CHANNEL – [TRIGGER] > "Trigger Manager..." Background information Refer to Chapter 5.1.4.1, "Partial Measurements and Driving Mode", on page 84.

  • Page 412: Sweep Control Tab

    ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Sweep Softtool For example, a new sweep can be triggered by an external trigger no. 1, while the indi- vidual sweep points are triggered by external trigger no. 2. External trigger 1 is ignored if a sweep is running, external trigger 2 is ignored if there is no running sweep. In the figure below a sweep comprises 5 measurement points and dotted arrows depict ignored trigger events.
  • Page 413 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Sweep Softtool Continuous / Single Activate either continuous or single sweep mode for the active channel. ● In "Continuous" mode, the analyzer measures continuously, repeating the current sweep. ● In "Single" sweep mode, the measurement is stopped after the configured number of Sweeps.
  • Page 414 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Sweep Softtool These actions are only available for the DEFAULT Remote Language). For other remote languages (compatibility modes), you can use the Restart Manager Dialog instead. Remote command: INITiate:CONTinuous:ALL Sweep Controller Activates/deactivates the (resizable) "Sweep Info" dialog, which displays the current sweep stage.

  • Page 415: Cal Softtool

    ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Cal Softtool Related information Refer to Chapter 5.1.4, "Sweep Control", on page 83. Sweep All Channels Apply the sweep control settings to all channels in the active recall set. The number of sweeps in a "Single" sweep sequence is equal to the selected number of "Sweeps" times the number of channels.

  • Page 416: Start Cal Tab

    ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Cal Softtool 6.11.1 Start Cal Tab The "Start Cal" tab provides access to all functions for automatic or manual calibration. Calibration of the R&S ZNB/ZNBT is a fully guided process. Background information Refer to the following sections: ●...
  • Page 417 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Cal Softtool Start Auto Cal Performs a fully automatic system error calibration for the active channel, using the active calibration unit with its factory calibration and auto-detection of ports. If one port is active, an OSM calibration is performed. If two ports are active, an UOSM calibration is performed.
  • Page 418 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Cal Softtool ● "Active Channel" if you only want to calibrate the active channel ● "All Channels" if you want to calibrate all channels in the current recall set ● "Selected Channels" if you want to calibrate only certain channels 6.11.1.3 Calibration Unit Wizard The "Calibration Unit"...
  • Page 419 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Cal Softtool ● A successful calibration supersedes the previous calibration, discarding all previ- ous system error correction data. To keep older correction data, you can transfer them to the calibration "Pool" using Calibration Manager Dialog. ●...
  • Page 420 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Cal Softtool Figure 6-12: Calibration Unit wizard, step 1: Ports (> 4 test ports) Ports Selects the test ports to be calibrated. Note: Calibration and port de-/activation. The way the analyzer fimware activates/deactivates ports after a successfull calibration (system error correction or power calibration) has slightly changed: ●...
  • Page 421 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Cal Softtool Remote command: SYSTem:COMMunicate:RDEVice:AKAL:ADDRess:ALL? SYSTem:COMMunicate:RDEVice:AKAL:ADDRess Characterization Displays all characterizations that are stored in the active cal unit. The "Factory" char- acterization is available for all calibration units; it ensures an accurate calibration for all standard applications.
  • Page 422 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Cal Softtool Common Port This combo-box is only available if Use Reduced Number of Through is activated in the "Calibration" tab of the "System Config" dialog. It defines the port that must appear in each port assignment of an automatic calibra- tion, and that will be used as the "center"...
  • Page 423 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Cal Softtool Figure 6-13: Calibration Unit wizard, step 2: Connections Figure 6-14: Calibration Unit wizard, step 2: Connections (>4 test ports and multiple port assign- ments) If multiple port assignments are required and "Use Reduced Number of Through" on page 675 is enabled, make sure that each port assignment contains the Common Port.
  • Page 424 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Cal Softtool The R&S ZNB/ZNBT always proposes an optimum solution (minimum number of assignments) that also minimizes the physical port reconnections required between calibration stages. For user-modified assignments, it provides assistive information indicating insufficient, or redundant entries. The test port connectors are automatically set according to the connector type of the selected calibration unit port.
  • Page 425 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Cal Softtool After all these calibration steps have been completed, the resulting system error cor- rection can be calculated and applied. In the upper part of the "Cal Unit" screen, the R&S ZNB/ZNBT shows the calibration sweep diagrams for the currently measured S-parameter.
  • Page 426 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Cal Softtool Figure 6-15: Multiple traces due to multiple paths The purpose of the typical result traces "Trc1"" and "Trc2" is to avoid connection errors and to track hardware problems: if the correct standard type is measured, and every- thing is properly connected, then the measured traces are expected to be similar to the typical trace.
  • Page 427 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Cal Softtool Remote command: [SENSe:]CORRection:COLLect:AUTO:PORTs:CONNection? Prev/Next Navigates between the port assignments. Only available if multiple port assignments are required. Apply/Cancel Apply the calculated system error correction to the active channel (or to all channels in the active recall set, if all channels were calibrated).
  • Page 428 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Cal Softtool culates the system error correction data (error terms) from the measurement data and applies the result to the active channel. Background and related information ● The "Multiple Cal in Calibration Wizard" feature is disabled by default and has to be activated in the Calibration Tab of the "System Config"...
  • Page 429 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Cal Softtool Access: Calibration Unit Wizard (MultiCal), Step 1: "Ports" > "Add..." / "Modify..." ● The "Multiple Cal in Calibration Wizard" (MultiCal) feature is disabled by default and has to be activated in the Calibration Tab of the "System Config"...
  • Page 430 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Cal Softtool Cal Unit Displays the connected calibration units. The R&S ZNB/ZNBT auto-detects all calibra- tion units which are connected to one of its USB ports. If several cal units are connec- ted, one of them must be selected for calibration (active cal unit). A warning is dis- played if the current sweep range of the network analyzer exceeds the characterized frequency range of the calibration unit.
  • Page 431 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Cal Softtool Note: Transmission normalization and "One Path Two Ports" calibration types require two-port (Through) characterization data for the cal unit. These two-port characteriza- tions can be unavailable in the factory characterizations of some older calibration units or in a user characterization.
  • Page 432 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Cal Softtool Step 3: Cal Unit During the calibration phase, the R&S ZNB/ZNBT displays a "Cal Unit" screen that guides the user through the correction data acquisition. Same logic as in the single calibration version of the wizard (see "Step 3: Cal Unit"...
  • Page 433 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Cal Softtool The layout of the main panel depends on the number of test ports available: Figure 6-18: Calibration Presetting: Ports and Type (> 4 test ports) Ports Selects the test ports to be calibrated. Note: Calibration and port de-/activation.
  • Page 434 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Cal Softtool The way the analyzer fimware activates/deactivates ports after a successfull calibration (system error correction or power calibration) has slightly changed: ● In all FW releases, calibrated ports that were previously disabled, are automatically enabled as single-ended logical ports.
  • Page 435 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Cal Softtool Step 2: Connectors and Cal Kits Selects the connector type and gender for all ports and allows you to import a calibra- tion kit. Background information Refer to Chapter 5.5.2, "Calibration Standards and Calibration Kits", on page 160.
  • Page 436 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Cal Softtool Figure 6-20: Calibration Setting: Connectors and Cal Kits (>4 ports) Connector / Gender Defines the connector types and genders of the ports to be calibrated. For symmetric (sexless) connector types (e.g. 7 mm / PC7), "Gender" is unavailable. If "Same Connector All Ports"...
  • Page 437 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Cal Softtool Remote command: [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:COLLect:CONNection:PORTs [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:COLLect:CONNection:GENDers Import Cal Kit... Opens the "Import Calibration Kit" dialog that allows you to import a cal kit file. For background information, see Chapter 5.5.2.4, "Cal Kit Files", on page 165. Remote command: MMEMory:LOAD:CKIT Back...
  • Page 438 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Cal Softtool Figure 6-21: Calibration Setting Wizard, Step 3: Calibration In the upper part of the "Calibration" screen, the R&S ZNB/ZNBT shows the sweep dia- grams for the currently measured S-parameter. The lower part displays the calibrated ports and standards and visualizes the measurement progress.
  • Page 439 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Cal Softtool Figure 6-22: Multiple traces due to multiple paths The purpose of the typical result traces "Trc1"" and "Trc2" is to avoid connection errors and to track hardware problems: if the correct standard type is measured, and every- thing is properly connected, then the measured traces are expected to be similar to the typical trace.
  • Page 440 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Cal Softtool "Don't Show this Dialog Again" has the same effect as disabling "Show Cal Kit Label". A green checkmark indicates that the calibration data of a standard has been acquired successfully. A green checkmark after the port symbol indicates that the minimum number of calibration measurements for the port has been performed.
  • Page 441 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Cal Softtool Note: Checks during the calculation of correction data Incompatibilities between the selected calibration type, the standards and the channel settings can cause the calibration to be inaccurate. The analyzer auto-detects potential sources of errors and displays appropriate, self-explanatory notice boxes. Remote command: [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:COLLect:SAVE:SELected[:DUMMy] [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:COLLect:SAVE:SELected:DEFault...
  • Page 442 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Cal Softtool Adds a new system error correction. The "Add" button opens the Define Calibration Dialog without pre-selected ports. Delete Deletes the selected calibration from the list of configured calibrations. Modify Edits the selected system error correction: opens the Define Calibration Dialog with the corresponding ports and calibration type pre-selected.
  • Page 443 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Cal Softtool The layout of the dialog panel depends on the number of test ports available. Figure 6-23: Define Calibration dialog (manual, > 4 test ports) Ports Selects the test ports to be calibrated. Note: Calibration and port de-/activation. The way the analyzer fimware activates/deactivates ports after a successfull calibration (system error correction or power calibration) has slightly changed: ●...
  • Page 444 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Cal Softtool the balanced port was dissolved and only the uncalibrated (single-ended) port was disabled. In earlier FW versions there was no such port deactivation mechanism. ● Since FW version 2.40 an uncalibrated port is only disabled if it is not used by a measurement, i.e.
  • Page 445 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Cal Softtool The upper part of the panel shows the previously configured calibrations. Select the appropriate one to get access to the related ports. For the individual calibrations, the functionality is the same as described for the "SingleCal" version of the wizard (see "Step 2: Connectors and Cal Kits"...
  • Page 446 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Cal Softtool Screen Elements From top to bottom, the screen consists of the following elements. Calibration Sweep Diagram The calibration sweep diagram in the upper part of the screen shows the progress of the calibration and the accuracy of a completed calibration ("Verification"). The diagram is scaled in "dB Mag"...
  • Page 447 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Cal Softtool Remote command: SOURce<Ch>:POWer<PhyPt>:CORRection[:ACQuire]:VERification: RESult? Port Overview Shows all source ports together with the possible power calibrations. For each analyzer port P1 ... PN, a "Ref. Receiver", a "Meas. Receiver" and a "Source Flatness" calibration can be performed. ●...
  • Page 448 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Cal Softtool SOURce<Ch>:POWer:CORRection:DATA:PORT<PhyPt> [SENSe<Chn>:]CORRection:PSTate? Power Cal Dialog (Ref. Receiver) In Ref. Receiver mode, the "Power Cal" dialog guides you through a reference receiver calibration. The selected source port is displayed with its cal power settings (see Chapter 6.11.3.2, "Modify Cal Power Dialog",...
  • Page 449 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Cal Softtool Calibrate Only Port Frequency Frequency Conversion Measurements, by default the reference receivers are cali- brated for all resulting frequencies – even if they are currently not relevant for some ports. Using this switch, you can limit the calibrated frequencies to those frequencies that are required for the related port, which results in shorter calibration times.
  • Page 450 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Cal Softtool "Source Port" defines the type of measurement receiver calibration: ● If the source port is equal to the calibrated port, the measurement receiver is cali- brated by the wave that is reflected back by a connected Open or Short standard. Connect the Open or Short standard to the calibrated port;...
  • Page 451 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Cal Softtool left = "Ref. Receiver" Pwr Cal Method right = "Power Meter" Pwr Cal Method Start Cal Sweep Start the calibration sweeps for the selected port and power calibration settings and close the dialog. The calibration is performed as described in "Calibration procedure"...
  • Page 452 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Cal Softtool 3. "SMARTerCal": a) Acquire measurement data for all required standards for the selected system error calibration type. b) Apply the calculated error terms to the active channel. c) Acquire the power calibration data at the selected source port. d) Use the source power calibration data to correct the absolute receiver powers at all calibrated ports.
  • Page 453 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Cal Softtool Figure 6-24: SMARTerCal (Cal Unit), Step 1: Ports Figure 6-25: SMARTerCal (Cal Unit), Step 1: Ports (> 4 Ports) Ports Selects the test ports to be calibrated. User Manual 1173.9163.02 ─ 53...
  • Page 454 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Cal Softtool It is possible to select any combination of two or more test ports. If you are only inter- ested in a single port p, perform a two-port SMARTerCal for a port pair including p (as Power Port).
  • Page 455 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Cal Softtool SYSTem:COMMunicate:RDEVice:AKAL:DATE? SYSTem:COMMunicate:RDEVice:AKAL:FRANge? SYSTem:COMMunicate:RDEVice:AKAL:PORTs? SYSTem:COMMunicate:RDEVice:AKAL:WARMup[:STATe]? Calibration Type Selects the calibration type for the selected physical ports. For an overview, refer to Chapter 5.5.7.2, "Calibration Types", on page 181. The calibration types PUOSM and PTOSM are compatible with all port combinations. Remote command: [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:COLLect:AUTO:TYPE [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:COLLect:AUTO:PORTs:TYPE...
  • Page 456 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Cal Softtool Figure 6-26: SMARTerCal (Cal Unit), Step 2: Connections (single) Figure 6-27: SMARTerCal (Cal Unit), Step 2: Connections Related information Refer to Chapter 5.5.5.4, "Multiple Port Assignments", on page 172 for details on multi- ple port assignments.
  • Page 457 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Cal Softtool The R&S ZNB/ZNBT always proposes an optimum solution (minimum number of assignments) that also minimizes the physical port reconnections required between calibration stages. For user-modified assignments, it provides assistive information indicating insufficient, or redundant entries. The test port connectors are automatically set according to the connector type of the selected calibration unit port.
  • Page 458 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Cal Softtool 2. Finally: a) Replace the calibration unit by the power meter. b) Start the power calibration sweep. The upper part of the screen displays power trace diagrams and the lower part dis- plays the power meter connection. User Manual 1173.9163.02 ─...
  • Page 459 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Cal Softtool Use "Next"/"Prev" to navigate between the calibration substeps. Start Cal Sweep / Abort Sweep Starts the necessary calibration sweeps or aborts them. Note: The power calibration sweep is performed at the "Reference Receiver Cal Power"...
  • Page 460 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Cal Softtool Remote command: [SENSe:]CORRection:COLLect:AUTO:PORTs:CONNection? Apply Is enabled when sufficient data have been acquired for the calibrated ports and stand- ards and for the power meter. The button starts the calculation of the calibration data and closes the calibration wizard.
  • Page 461 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Cal Softtool 2. "Connections": Define the port assignments between the R&S ZNB/ZNBT and the calibration units. 3. "SMARTerCal": a) For each configured SMARTerCal and port assignment, acquire error correc- tion data for the required calibration standards (provided by the selected cali- bration unit).
  • Page 462 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Cal Softtool Modify Edits the selected system error correction: opens the Define Calibration Dialog with the corresponding ports and calibration type pre-selected. Next Proceeds to Step 2: Connections. Inactive as long as no SMARTerCal is defined. Define Calibration Dialog In MultiCal mode, the "Define Calibration"...
  • Page 463 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Cal Softtool The way the analyzer fimware activates/deactivates ports after a successfull calibration (system error correction or power calibration) has slightly changed: ● In all FW releases, calibrated ports that were previously disabled, are automatically enabled as single-ended logical ports.
  • Page 464 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Cal Softtool Calibration Type Selects the calibration type for the selected physical ports. For an overview, refer to Chapter 5.5.7.2, "Calibration Types", on page 181. The calibration types PUOSM and PTOSM are compatible with all port combinations. Remote command: [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:COLLect:AUTO:TYPE [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:COLLect:AUTO:PORTs:TYPE...
  • Page 465 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Cal Softtool Figure 6-29: Multiple port assignments Similar functionality as for the "SingleCal" version of the wizard (see "Step 2: Connec- tions" on page 455): select the adequate calibration in the "Cal Type"/"Ports" table to display and edit the corresponding port assignments.
  • Page 466 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Cal Softtool a) Acquire error correction data for the required ports and port pairs, and the required standards. b) Acquire source power calibration data at the "Power Port". c) Finally, decide whether to apply the resulting calibration. Background and related information ●...
  • Page 467 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Cal Softtool Figure 6-30: SMARTerCal (Manual), Step 1: Ports and Type The layout of the main panel depends on the number of test ports available. Figure 6-31: SMARTerCal(Manual), Step 1: Ports and Type (>4 ports) User Manual 1173.9163.02 ─...
  • Page 468 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Cal Softtool Ports Selects the test ports to be calibrated. It is possible to select any combination of two or more test ports. If you are only inter- ested in a single port p, perform a two-port SMARTerCal for a port pair including p (as Power Port).
  • Page 469 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Cal Softtool Step 2: Connectors and Cal Kits Selects the connector type and gender for all ports and allows you to import a calibra- tion kit. Background information Refer to Chapter 5.5.2, "Calibration Standards and Calibration Kits", on page 160.
  • Page 470 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Cal Softtool Figure 6-33: SMARTerCal(Manual), Step 2: Connectors and Cal Kits (>4 ports) The upper part of the panel shows the selected ports and the calibration type. The lower part gives access to the connector and cal kit settings. Connector / Gender Defines the connector types and genders of the ports to be calibrated.
  • Page 471 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Cal Softtool Same Connector All Ports / Same Gender All Ports Assigns the same connector type or gender to all selected physical ports. For some multi-port calibration types, the port connector types must be equal, e.g. because they require a Through standard with known characteristics.
  • Page 472 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Cal Softtool The upper part of the calibration screen presents ● calibration sweep diagrams for the currently measured S-parameter during stand- ards measurement, ● power trace diagrams during the power calibration sweep The lower part displays the calibrated port (pairs) with their related measurements and visualizes the measurement progress.
  • Page 473 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Cal Softtool The purpose of the typical result traces "Trc1"" and "Trc2" is to avoid connection errors and to track hardware problems: if the correct standard type is measured, and every- thing is properly connected, then the measured traces are expected to be similar to the typical trace.
  • Page 474 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Cal Softtool ● If inactive, the R&S ZNB/ZNBT permanently refreshes all traces of all diagrams which can put a heavy load on the connected switch matrices (if any). Hence it is recommended (and default) to activate it, in particular if one of the matrices uses mechanical switches (that wear off apart from making noise).
  • Page 475 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Cal Softtool Step 1: Ports and Type The first page of the wizard presents the list of already configured SMARTerCals and allows you to: ● "Add" new SMARTerCals ● "Delete" or "Modify" existing SMARTerCals Adds a new SMARTerCal. The "Add"...
  • Page 476 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Cal Softtool Figure 6-35: Define Calibration dialog (SMARTerCal) The layout of the main panel depends on the number of test ports available. Figure 6-36: Define Calibration dialog (SMARTerCal, >4 ports) Ports Selects the test ports to be calibrated. It is possible to select any combination of two or more test ports.
  • Page 477 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Cal Softtool the balanced port was dissolved and only the uncalibrated (single-ended) port was disabled. In earlier FW versions there was no such port deactivation mechanism. ● Since FW version 2.40 an uncalibrated port is only disabled if it is not used by a measurement, i.e.

  • Page 478: Cal Devices Tab

    ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Cal Softtool Back Go back to Step 2: Connectors and Cal Kits. Start Start Step 3: Calibration. Step 3: Calibration Allows you to acquire error correction data for every required port (pair) and calibration standard, plus power correction data from the power meter. Same functionality as for the single calibration version of the wizard (see "Step 3: Cali- bration"...
  • Page 479 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Cal Softtool 6.11.2.1 Cal Connector Types Dialog The "Cal Connector Types" dialog displays and modifies the list of available connector types. Cal connector types must be selected in accordance with the connectors of the measured DUT. Access: CHANNEL –...
  • Page 480 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Cal Softtool ● The calculation of impedance and admittance parameters (see Chapter 5.3.3, "Impedance Parameters", on page 120 and Chapter 5.3.4, "Admittance Parame- ters", on page 124). Remote command: [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:CONNection Line Type / Rel. Permittivity εr / Cutoff Freq. fc "Line Type"...
  • Page 481 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Cal Softtool Remote command: [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:CONNection [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:CONNection:CATalog? [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:CONNection:DELete 6.11.2.2 Calibration Kits Dialog The "Calibration Kits" dialog shows the available calibration kits for the different con- nector types. It is also used for cal kit and cal kit file management. Access: CHANNEL –...
  • Page 482 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Cal Softtool Controls in the Calibration Kits Dialog Connector Type The "Connector Type" table displays the available cal kit connector types. Select a row in this table to get the list of Available Cal Kits. Remote command: [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:CONNection:CATalog? Available Cal Kits...
  • Page 483 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Cal Softtool [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:CONNection:CATalog? [SENSe:]CORRection:CKIT:CATalog? Import Cal Kit... / Export Cal Kit... The buttons below the "Connector Type" list are used to store cal kit data to a file and to reload previously stored cal kit files. By default, calibration kit files are stored in the C:\Users\Public\Documents\Rohde-Schwarz\Vna\Calibration directory;...
  • Page 484 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Cal Softtool One Port Standards / Two Port Standards The standard tables contain the following information: ● "Type" and "Gender" describe the calibration standard type; for an overview see Chapter 5.5.2.1, "Calibration Standard Types", on page 161. ●...
  • Page 485 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Cal Softtool Remote command: MMEMory:LOAD:CKIT:SDATa View / Modify Cal Kit Standards Dialog The "View / Modify Cal Kit Standards" dialog shows the circuit model for a selected cal- ibration standard. It is also used to define or edit the circuit model (offset and load) parameters for a user-defined standard.
  • Page 486 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Cal Softtool ● Otherwise the standard is characterized by the R&S ZVR-compatible parameters "Electrical Length" (in m), "Char. Imp." (in Ω) and "Loss" (in dB/sqrt(GHz)). The loss is zero and not editable as long as the electrical length is zero. Both parameter sets are closely related.
  • Page 487 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Cal Softtool Controls in the Characterize Cal Unit Dialog Calibration Unit Displays the connected calibration units. The R&S ZNB/ZNBT auto-detects all calibra- tion units which are connected to one of its USB ports. If several cal units are connec- ted, one of them must be selected for characterization (active cal unit).
  • Page 488 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Cal Softtool The properties of the selected characterization are shown below the list. "Delete" dele- tes the selected characterization file; "Start Characterization..." opens the Characteri- zation Wizard to create a characterization. Remote command: SYSTem:COMMunicate:RDEVice:AKAL:CKIT:CATalog? SYSTem:COMMunicate:RDEVice:AKAL:CKIT:STANdard:CATalog? SYSTem:COMMunicate:RDEVice:AKAL:SDATa? Characterization Wizard The "Characterization"...
  • Page 489 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Cal Softtool Test Port Assignment Defines the assignment between test ports and cal unit ports. In the default "Manual" assignment, VNA ports and cal unit port numbers match. If you decide to use a differ- ent assignment, you can auto-detect the actual assignment ("Automatic") or select the analyzer port numbers manually.

  • Page 490: Pwr Cal Settings Tab

    ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Cal Softtool Step 2: Save Characterization Data Saves the characterization data to the calibration unit. Figure 6-37: Save Characterization Data Save File to SD Card For all calibration units, characterization data can be saved to the calibration unit's internal flash memory.
  • Page 491 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Cal Softtool Efficient power calibration procedure ● For standard applications, open the "Start Cal" tab and select "Scalar Power Cal" – "Power Cal..." to perform the necessary calibration sweeps with default power cali- bration settings. You do not need any of the buttons in the "Pwr Cal Settings" tab. ●...
  • Page 492 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Cal Softtool Remote command: SOURce<Ch>:POWer<PhyPt>:CORRection:OSOurces[:STATe] Flatness Cal – Max Iterations Sets a limit for the number of calibration sweeps. See also "Calibration procedure" on page 176. Remote command: SOURce<Ch>:POWer<PhyPt>:CORRection:NREadings SOURce<Ch>:POWer<PhyPt>:CORRection:COLLect:AVERage[:COUNt] Flatness Cal – Tolerance Defines the maximum deviation of the measured power from the cal power. The cali- bration procedure is stopped if "Max Iterations"...
  • Page 493 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Cal Softtool Remote command: SOURce:POWer:CORRection:PMETer:ID Auto Zero Initiates an automatic zeroing procedure of the power meter; see "Zeroing" on page 238. Remote command: SYSTem:COMMunicate:RDEVice:PMETer<Pmtr>:AZERo 6.11.3.2 Modify Cal Power Dialog The "Modify Cal Power" dialog adjusts the target power for the power calibration (cal power) and defines the target power for the reference receiver calibration.
  • Page 494 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Cal Softtool Port Cal Power Allows you to define (port-specific) power levels for source power calibrations. Port Overview ← Port Cal Power The dialog shows all source ports of the network analyzer. Each port is displayed with the current "Power Result"...
  • Page 495 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Cal Softtool Reference Receiver Cal Power Defines the source power the R&S ZNB/ZNBT uses to perform the first calibration sweep of the source power calibration. In this first sweep, the power meter reading is used to calibrate the reference receiver of the calibrated port. The following calibration sweeps are based solely on the reference receiver (see "Calibration procedure"...
  • Page 496 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Cal Softtool Test Setup The button group on the right of the dialog allows you to select a test setup with an additional two-port device. This device can be located in front of the DUT (during the measurement) or in front of the power meter (during power calibration).

  • Page 497: Use Cal Tab

    ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Cal Softtool SOURce<Ch>:POWer<PhyPt>:CORRection:TCOefficient:COUNt? SOURce<Ch>:POWer<PhyPt>:CORRection:TCOefficient:DELete<ListNo>[: DUMMy] SOURce<Ch>:POWer<PhyPt>:CORRection:TCOefficient:DELete<ListNo>: Get Trace... Opens a selection box containing all traces in the active recall set. The "dB Mag" val- ues of the selected trace are used to define the transmission coefficients. Notice that if you combine different channels with different sweep points, the analyzer possibly has to interpolate or extrapolate the transmission coefficients.
  • Page 498 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Cal Softtool 6.11.4.1 Controls on the Use Cal Tab The buttons in the "Use Cal" tab open the following dialogs: ● "Scalar Power Cal" – "Active Power Cals...": Active Power Cals Dialog ● "Manage Cals" – "Cal Manager...": See Calibration Manager Dialog User Cal Active Activates or deactivates the system error correction in the active channel.
  • Page 499 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Cal Softtool Note: Disable the load match correction if your test setup or DUT is not suited for reverse sweeps or if you want to gain speed. Remote command: [SENSe<Ch>:]FREQuency:CONVersion:GAIN:LMCorrection Scalar Power Cal – All Power Cals On / All Power Cals Off Activates or deactivates all scalar power calibrations in the active channel.
  • Page 500 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Cal Softtool All possible power calibrations can be performed from the Power Cal Wizard. Port Overview Shows all source ports together with their possible power calibrations. Unavailable cali- brations (i.e. calibrations that have not been performed yet) are grayed out. If external generators are configured, they appear as additional source ports G1 ...
  • Page 501 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Cal Softtool Channel State The "Channel State" table shows all channels in the active recall set together with their current calibration. Channels can use either the active channel calibration (if available), a previously stored user correction data or the factory system error correction (indica- ted as '--').
  • Page 502 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Cal Softtool For channels that are linked to a "Cal Group" (using "Apply" or "Apply to All"), a new calibration overwrites the cal group data and hence affects all channels that are also linked to this cal group. An "Overwrite Warning" is displayed in this case. To continue with the calibration, confirm by using button "Overwrite Current File?"...

  • Page 503: Channel Config Softtool

    ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Channel Config Softtool Ch<n> Calibration Properties/Cal Group <n> Properties Displays the basic channel settings and the properties of the system error correction and the power correction for the channel (calibration group) selected in the "Channel State"...
  • Page 504 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Channel Config Softtool 6.12.1.1 Controls on the Channels Tab The buttons in the "Channels" tab open the following dialogs: ● "Channel Manager...": see Chapter 6.12.1.2, "Channel Manager Dialog", on page 506 ● "RFFE...": see Chapter 6.12.1.3, "RFFE Config Dialog for R&S ZN-B15/-Z15 Var. 03", on page 507 Active Channel...
  • Page 505 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Channel Config Softtool Tips: ● To create a channel and a trace with default settings and to display the trace in a new diagram area, use New Channel + Diagram. ● Add Trace to create a trace in the active channel. Remote command: CONFigure:CHANnel<Ch>[:STATe] CALCulate<Ch>:PARameter:SDEFine...
  • Page 506 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Channel Config Softtool Remote command: CONFigure:CHANnel<Ch>[:STATe] Channel On Toggles the measurement state of the Active Channel. Remote command: CONFigure:CHANnel<Ch>:MEASure[:STATe] Fixture Simulator The "Fixture Simulator" switch deactivates or activates the configured deembedding, embedding, balanced ports, and port impedance settings for the selected channel. When "Fixture Simulator"...
  • Page 507 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Channel Config Softtool Channel table The rows and columns of the channel table represent the existing channels (rows) together with certain editable (white) or non-editable (gray) properties (columns). ● "Name" indicates the name of the related channel. ●...
  • Page 508 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Channel Config Softtool If the R&S ZNB is equipped with variant 02 of the extension board, a slightly different user interface is shown. The "Measurement" columns are hidden and the remaining content of the RFFE and GPIO tab are presented on a single "Control" tab. Background information Refer to Chapter 5.7.13, "RFFE GPIO...
  • Page 509 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Channel Config Softtool Sweep Sequencer Tab Gives access to the "Sweep Sequencer" functionality, see Chapter 6.12.1.6, "Sweep Sequencer", on page 515. GPIOs Tab The "GPIOs" tab is split into two parts: ● The left part of the table area (up to column "Output Voltage") allows you to define and apply the GPIO pin voltages (see "Basic GPIO Configuration"...
  • Page 510 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Channel Config Softtool 6.12.1.4 RFFE Interface Configuration Access: RFFE Tab of the "RFFE Config" dialog Basic RFFE Interface Settings and Command Execution The RFFE config table gives access to the channel-specific setup of the two RFFE bus interfaces RFFE1 and RFFE2.
  • Page 511 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Channel Config Softtool In this dialog, enter the following parameters (according to the device to be controlled): ● "SA": a slave address between 0 and 15 as 1 hex digit ● "CMD": a command number between 0 and 255 as 2 hex digits ●...
  • Page 512 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Channel Config Softtool ● The measurement parameters are channel-specific. However only one configura- tion can be measured at a time. ● Voltage and current measurements on the RFFE and GPIO pins are only possible with Var. 03 of the extension board R&S ZN-B15/Z15 (part number 1323.9355.03 or 1325.5905.03).
  • Page 513 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Channel Config Softtool Start Meas Starts the voltage and current measurement. Note that "Start Meas" does not automatically activate the "Output Voltage" and "Range" / "Shunt" settings of the current channel. Use to activate them manually. The measurement (=sampling) time can only be set via remote command.
  • Page 514 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Channel Config Softtool Remote command: CONTrol<Ch>:GPIO<Port>[:STATe] Voltage / Output Voltage Sets the (default) voltage of the respective GPIO pin for R&S ZN-B15/-Z15 Var. 02 / Var. 03. Remote command: CONTrol<Ch>:GPIO<Port>:VOLTage[:DEFault] Apply Use the "Apply" button to activate the configured voltage (and Range / Shunt) settings to the GPIO pins.
  • Page 515 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Channel Config Softtool Range / Shunt "Range" defines an upper bound of the current to be measured on the respective GPIO pin. The analyzer firmware automatically selects a suitable shunt resistance. Possible ranges for ports 1 to 8 are { 2·10 μA | n=1,...,5 }.
  • Page 516 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Channel Config Softtool ● Make sure that the required RFFE bus interfaces and GPIO ports are enabled by setting the respective "Seq." flags in the "RFFE Config" dialog (see "Basic RFFE Interface Settings and Command Execution" on page 510 and Basic GPIO Config- uration).

  • Page 517: Port Config Tab

    ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Channel Config Softtool Remote command: CONTrol<Ch>:RFFE<Bus>:SETTings[:STATe] Unsegmented sweeps CONTrol<Ch>:SEQuence<Nr>:RFFE<Bus>:COMMand:DATA Segmented sweeps: CONTrol<Ch>:SEGMent<Nr>:SEQuence<Nr>:RFFE<Bus>:COMMand:DATA GPIO columns (sweep sequencer table) The cells in the "GPIO" columns define the sequence of voltages to be applied to the respective GPIO ports. Remote command: CONTrol<Ch>:GPIO<Port>[:STATe] Unsegmented sweeps...
  • Page 518 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Channel Config Softtool 6.12.2.1 Controls on the Port Config Tab If either multiple DUTs are configured (see Chapter 6.12.2.3, "Define Parallel Measure- ment Dialog", on page 527) or the "Fixture Simulator" is disabled for the related channel (see "Fixture Simulator"...
  • Page 519 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Channel Config Softtool Note: If either multiple DUTs are configured (see Chapter 6.12.2.3, "Define Parallel Measurement Dialog", on page 527) or the "Fixture Simulator" is disabled for the related channel (see "Fixture Simulator" on page 506), the "Balanced Ports..." button is inactive (grayed out).
  • Page 520 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Channel Config Softtool If any of the port frequencies are changed from their preset values, the frequency con- version mode is activated on pressing "Apply" or "OK" in the dialog. An "Arb" label appears in the channel line. "Reset" plus "Apply" or "OK" deactivates the arbitrary mode.
  • Page 521 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Channel Config Softtool Switching on the signal source permanently eliminates the power settling times of the DUT but can introduce measurement inaccuracies, e.g. due to crosstalk between two ports. Therefore, "Gen" must be switched off to perform a system error correction. Note: For the R&S ZNB, among the analyzer ports driven by the same internal source,...
  • Page 522 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Channel Config Softtool Modify Frequency Conversion Dialog The "Modify Frequency Conversion" dialog defines a port-specific frequency formula (for frequency sweeps) or CW frequency (for power, time and CW Mode sweeps). Access: Port Settings Dialog > "Arb Frequency" tab > "Freq. Conversion" cells Dependencies The analyzer firmware enforces the following rules: ●...
  • Page 523 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Channel Config Softtool ● User-defined formulas are updated automatically: if a user defined formula is selected and the "Frequency Conversion Formula" on page 523 is modified, then the formula itself is modified. As a consequence, all "Freq. Conversion" definitions using this formula are modified as well.
  • Page 524 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Channel Config Softtool Non-editable table columns In addition to the test ports ("Port"), the source ports include all configured external generators ("Gen"). Each port is displayed with its port number and device type ("Info"). For each port, the available power range and resulting port power are calculated from the configured power conversion and source attenuation settings.
  • Page 525 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Channel Config Softtool The control elements in the "Modify Cal Power" dialog are described in the following sections: ● "Channel Base Power" on page 494 ● "Port Power Offset" on page 494 ● "Cal Power Offset" on page 494 Receiver Level Tab Provides access to the receiver step attenuator settings.
  • Page 526 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Channel Config Softtool Common Controls Modified "Port Settings" take effect on "Apply" or "OK". Use "Cancel" to discard possi- ble changes. Reset Resets the "Freq. Conversion" and "Power Conversion" settings of all ports. After "Reset", an "Apply" or "OK" terminates the arbitrary mode. Remote command: [SENSe<Ch>:]FREQuency:CONVersion FUNDamental...
  • Page 527 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Channel Config Softtool Figure 6-40: Stimulus Dialog: Power Sweep Except for the "Enter & Display" properties, all these parameters can also be set in the Sweep Softtool. Depending on the channel's Sweep Type, a different set of parameters can be modified.
  • Page 528 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Channel Config Softtool A R&S ZNB/ZNBT with two internal sources allows parallel measurements with "Fre- quency Offset", which can be configured in the corresponding tab on the right. Figure 6-41: Define Parallel Measurement (R&S ZNB) For the R&S ZNBT, the table and controls in the lower left part allow you to define the available DUTs along with their physical ports.
  • Page 529 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Channel Config Softtool Figure 6-42: Define Parallel Measurement (R&S ZNBT with 24 ports) ● Modified settings are not applied unless the "Define Parallel Measurement" dialog is closed with the "OK" button. ● On "OK", any pre-existing logical port configuration is overwritten. ●...
  • Page 530 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Channel Config Softtool 2. Use "Set" to prepare the DUT configuration. Modify the DUT/connection configuration according to your needs (see procedures below). Add/delete DUTs manually (R&S ZNBT only) 1. Use the "Add" button to introduce a new DUT. This action is active if and only if there are unconnected VNA ports.
  • Page 531 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Channel Config Softtool a) In the DUT perspective, toggle select the DUT port you want to connect or reconnect. b) In the "DUT Definition" tab, toggle select the VNA port you want to connect to the selected DUT port.
  • Page 532 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Channel Config Softtool In order to modify the balanced port configuration, proceed as follows: 1. Select the related row in the DUT table. The DUT perspective (upper left part of the dialog) now displays the selected DUT. 2.
  • Page 533 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Channel Config Softtool It is essential to perform the calibration with the same "Frequency Offset" settings as for the actual measurement; otherwise the calibration is deactivated ("Cal Off"). If there is a mismatch, the Calibration Manager Dialog provides additional information.

  • Page 534: Mode Tab

    ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Channel Config Softtool The generated error code can be retrieved via remote control command SOURce<Ch>:GROup:SIMultaneous:FOFFset:CONDition?. The configuration problems listed above are indicated as error codes -8 "invalid offset or frequency spac- ing" and -6 "no simultaneous mode possible". Remote command: SOURce<Ch>:GROup<Grp>:SIMultaneous:FOFFset:CONDition 6.12.3 Mode Tab...
  • Page 535 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Channel Config Softtool The "Driving Mode" setting is also used during a system error correction. For channels which require a single partial measurement only, the driving mode settings are equiva- lent. See also Chapter 5.1.4.1, "Partial Measurements and Driving Mode", on page 84.
  • Page 536 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Channel Config Softtool For a wide bandpass, the spurious response flattens the filter edges. The spurious signal can be eliminated by dividing the sweep range into two segments with different LO settings: ● In the low-frequency segment ranging up to the center frequency of the bandpass filter, the frequency of the local oscillator is set to LO <...
  • Page 537 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Channel Config Softtool Manual Config... The "Manual Config..." button opens the "AGC Manual Configuration" dialog that allows to configure the GC for the individual sweep segments, drive ports and receiv- ers. This button is enabled in "Manual" AGC Mode only.
  • Page 538 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Channel Config Softtool Remote command: [SENSe<Ch>:]SEGMent<Seg>:POWer:GAINcontrol [SENSe<Ch>:]SEGMent<Seg>:POWer:GAINcontrol:ALL Drive-port specific settings "Drive Port", "a", "b<j>": Selects the AGC mode for the respective drive port, a and b wave and receivers. "Auto" (column): Enables the automatic mode for the corresponding drive port, disa- bling the manual configuration for the related a- and b-waves.

  • Page 539: Intermod. Tab

    ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Channel Config Softtool 6.12.4 Intermod. Tab Controls the intermodulation measurement including power calibration. The intermodu- lation measurement requires options R&S ZNB/ZNBT-K4 and R&S ZNB/ZNBT-K14. The results can be selected using the "Intermod." tab of the "Meas" softtool, see Chap- ter 6.2.4, "Intermod.
  • Page 540 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Channel Config Softtool Reset Freq Conv Intermod Disables the intermodulation measurement mode for the active channel and switches back to normal mode (no frequency conversion). The intermodulation settings are maintained, however, the intermodulation traces are eliminated, and the default trace ) is displayed.
  • Page 541 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Channel Config Softtool ● "Add CW Mode" Activates a new channel for the spectrum measurement. The "CW Frequency" plus half the "Tone Distance" defines the center of the diagram. ● "Max IM Order" Defines the width of the spectrum measurement. Remote command: [SENSe<Ch>:]FREQuency[:CW] [SENSe<Ch>:]FREQuency:IMODulation:SPECtrum:MORDer...
  • Page 542 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Channel Config Softtool 2. Define the (frequency or power) sweep ranges for the lower tone. Refer to Chap- ter 6.12.4.4, "Frequencies and Power Dialog", on page 548. User Manual 1173.9163.02 ─ 53...
  • Page 543 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Channel Config Softtool 3. Select the measurement results. Refer to Chapter 6.2.4, "Intermod. Tab", on page 267. User Manual 1173.9163.02 ─ 53...
  • Page 544 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Channel Config Softtool 4. Finish the wizard with or without power calibration. Refer to Chapter 6.12.4.5, "Intermod. Pwr. Cal Wizard", on page 549. User Manual 1173.9163.02 ─ 53...
  • Page 545 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Channel Config Softtool 6.12.4.3 Define Intermodulation Distortion Measurement Dialog The dialog configures the intermodulation measurement (except for power and fre- quency settings). The "OK" button is available when a valid configuration has been defined. Access: CHANNEL – [CHANNEL CONFIG] > "Intermod" > "Define Intermod..." Independent sources for the lower and upper tone requires a R&S ZNB/ZNBT with two internal sources (see Chapter 5.7.8, "Internal Second...
  • Page 546 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Channel Config Softtool Lower Tone Selects an analyzer port as a source of the lower tone signal. Remote command: [SENSe<Ch>:]FREQuency:IMODulation:LTONe Upper Tone Selects an analyzer port or external generator as a source of the upper tone signal. The source must be different from the lower tone source, i.e.
  • Page 547 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Channel Config Softtool Selecting a different source is necessary, if the bandwidth of the "Combiner Out" signal does not fully cover the required receiver frequency range. For example, if a filter is used at the combiner output to cut off the intermodulation products originating from the combiner.
  • Page 548 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Channel Config Softtool Remote command: [SENSe<Ch>:]BWIDth[:RESolution]:SELect 6.12.4.4 Frequencies and Power Dialog The "Frequencies and Power" dialog defines the (frequency or power) sweep ranges for the lower tone. The frequency of the upper tone is equal to the lower tone fre- quency plus the "Tone Distance"...
  • Page 549 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Channel Config Softtool Fit Frequency Range If one of the ranges exceeds the analyzer limits, the "Fit Frequency Range" button restricts the lower tone sweep range so that the analyzer can measure all selected IM products.
  • Page 550 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Channel Config Softtool If a frequency conversion measurement is active, a second source power calibra- tion is performed at the converted lower tone frequency (receiver frequency). This second source power calibration is the basis for the receiver calibration in step 3. ●...

  • Page 551: Pwr Cal Settings Tab

    ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Channel Config Softtool The progress of the calibration is monitored in the calibration sweep diagram, in close analogy to an ordinary power sweep; see "Calibration Sweep Diagram" on page 446. Remote command: SOURce<Ch>:POWer<PhyPt>:CORRection:IMODulation:LTONe[:ACQuire] SOURce<Ch>:POWer<PhyPt>:CORRection:IMODulation:UTONe[:ACQuire] SOURce<Ch>:POWer<PhyPt>:CORRection[:ACQuire] [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:POWer<PhyPt>:IMODulation:ACQuire Apply After all calibration steps have finished successfully, "Apply"...
  • Page 552 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Channel Config Softtool Background information Refer to the following sections: ● Chapter 5.7.4.2, "Scalar Mixer Measurements", on page 218 ● "Two-Stage Mixer Measurements" on page 219 6.12.6.1 Controls on the Mixer Mode Tab Most of the "Mixer Mode" buttons are only enabled if the mixer measurement is set up properly.
  • Page 553 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Channel Config Softtool Access: CHANNEL – [CHANNEL CONFIG] > "Mixer Mode" > "Mixer Meas Wizard..." The setup of the mixer measurement proceeds in 4 steps: 1. Define the mixer. Chapter 6.12.6.3, "(Mixer) Setup Dialog", on page 555. 2.
  • Page 554 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Channel Config Softtool Measurement Parameter Channel Name Trace Name LO[m] Feedthrough Ch_LO LO_Thru S<j><k> <i> = RF test port number, <j> = IF test port number,<k> = LO test port number [m] = Mixer number (only if 2 mixers are measured) measured w/o frequency conversion Note that LO parameters can only be measured if a VNA port was selected as the respective LO in the previous step.
  • Page 555 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Channel Config Softtool Depending on your selection, the wizard either closes without calibration or launches one of the mixer measurement-specific SMARTerCal wizards (see Chap- ter 6.12.6.4, "SMARTerCal (Cal Unit) Wizard for Mixer Mode", on page 559 and Chapter 6.12.6.5, "SMARTerCal (Manual) Wizard for Mixer Mode", on page 561).
  • Page 556 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Channel Config Softtool Port selection The port selection lists in the upper part of the dialog contain all analyzer ports or external generators which can provide the RF signal and local oscillator (LO) signals. The fractional numbers in the rectangles indicate the frequency conversion settings from the "Frequency"...
  • Page 557 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Channel Config Softtool Power tab The "Power" tab defines the power of the RF and the LO signals. The table in the "Power" tab contains the following columns: ● "Port" contains the RF and IF ports and one or two LO ports, depending on whether the "2nd Mixer"...
  • Page 558 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Channel Config Softtool Remote command: [SENSe<Ch>:]FREQuency:CONVersion:MIXer:RFMultiplier [SENSe<Ch>:]FREQuency:CONVersion:MIXer:LOMultiplier<Stg> 2nd Mixer Selects the measurement for a test setup including two mixers (instead of a single one); see Two-Stage Mixer Measurements. The signal diagram and the other control elements in the dialog are adjusted accordingly.
  • Page 559 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Channel Config Softtool Remote command: [SENSe<Ch>:]FREQuency:CONVersion 6.12.6.4 SMARTerCal (Cal Unit) Wizard for Mixer Mode Allows to perfom a variant of an automatic "SMARTerCal" that is specially tailored to the "Mixer Mode". Access: CHANNEL – [CHANNEL CONFIG] > "Mixer Mode" > "SMARTerCal" – "Start...
  • Page 560 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Channel Config Softtool If the R&S ZNB/ZNBT is used as LO and only a 2-port Cal Unit is available, Multi- ple Port Assignments are required. 2. Perform a SMARTerCal: Figure 6-43: System Error Correction User Manual 1173.9163.02 ─ 53...
  • Page 561 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Channel Config Softtool Figure 6-44: Scalar Power Calibration 6.12.6.5 SMARTerCal (Manual) Wizard for Mixer Mode Allows to perfom a variant of a manual "SMARTerCal" that is specially tailored to the "Mixer Mode". Access: CHANNEL – [CHANNEL CONFIG] > "Mixer Mode" > "SMARTerCal" – "Start...

  • Page 562: Offset Embed Softtool

    ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Offset Embed Softtool 2. Perform a SMARTerCal: Figure 6-45: System Error Correction Figure 6-46: Scalar Power Calibration 6.13 Offset Embed Softtool The "Offset Embed" softtool allows you to define a length offset and loss for each test port.

  • Page 563: Offset Embed Dock Widget

    ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Offset Embed Softtool DUT. It also contains advanced functions for deembedding/embedding the DUT from/ into more general physical/virtual (matching) networks placed between the calibrated reference plane and the DUT. Access: CHANNEL – [OFFSET EMBED] Background information Refer to Chapter 5.6, "Offset Parameters and De-/Embedding",...
  • Page 564 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Offset Embed Softtool Access: Overview Panel > "Offset" Figure 6-48: Offset Embed dock widget: Offset panel The "Offset" panel can also be activated by selecting the Offset Tab One Way Loss Tab. Refer to its description for background information, additional parameters and remote commands.
  • Page 565 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Offset Embed Softtool The "Single Ended" panel can also be activated by selecting the Single Ended Tab softtool tab. Refer to its description for background information, parameters and addi- tional remote commands. Active The checkbox in the "Active" column activates or deactivates the selected "Single Ended"...
  • Page 566 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Offset Embed Softtool Move Up / Move Down Allows you to modify the sequence in which the active port set deembeddings/embed- dings are applied. Add / Delete Allows you to define the "Port Sets" to whom a deembedding or embedding network can be assigned.
  • Page 567 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Offset Embed Softtool File Name <i>/Inc. Seq. <i> The "File Name 1" (and "File Name 2") buttons are enabled as long as the selected deembedding/embedding Port Sets Tab is defined using one or two Touchstone file(s). When loading a touchstone file, the analyzer by default assumes odd ports left (VNA side), even ports right (DUT side).
  • Page 568 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Offset Embed Softtool This panel can also be activated by selecting the Balanced Tab. Refer to its description for background information, parameters and additional remote commands. Active The checkboxes in the "Active" column activate or deactivate the configured de-/ embeding for the related balanced port (i.e.
  • Page 569 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Offset Embed Softtool For the "1-Port Data" network type, the required touchstone file can also be selected from here ("..."). This panel can also be activated by selecting the Ground Loop Tab softtool tab. Refer to its description for background information, parameters and additional remote com- mands.
  • Page 570 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Offset Embed Softtool Active The "Active" flags are inversely related to the Use Default flags of the logical port con- figuration (see Balanced Ports Dialog). "Active" "Use Default" ☑ ☐ ☐ ☑ 6.13.1.8 Differential Match Panel This panel allows you to activate or deactivate differential match embedding.

  • Page 571: Offset Tab

    ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Offset Embed Softtool Remote command: CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:DIFFerential: EMBedding<LogPt>[:STATe] File Name 1 The ellipsis button in the "File Name 1" column is enabled if a 2-port data Network selected. When loading the touchstone file (*.s2p), the analyzer by default assumes odd ports left (VNA side), even ports right (DUT side).
  • Page 572 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Offset Embed Softtool 6.13.2.1 Controls on the Offset Tab The "Fixture Compensation..." button opens the Fixture Compensation Dialog. Overview This button is available on all "Offset Embed" softtool tabs. It opens the Overview Panel in the Offset Embed Dock Widget.
  • Page 573 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Offset Embed Softtool Remote command: [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:EDELay<PhyPt>[:TIME] [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:EDELay<PhyPt>:ELENgth [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:EDELay<PhyPt>:DISTance Permittivity / Velocity Factor Defines the permittivity (ε ) and velocity factor of the dielectric in the transmission line between the reference plane and the DUT. The velocity factor is 1/sqrt(ε ) and is a measure for the velocity of light in a dielectric with permittivity ε...
  • Page 574 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Offset Embed Softtool If "Adjust Time Gate" is on, the time gate is moved to left (right) when the offset-correc- ted reference plane is moved to the right (left). Its absolute position remains fixed. With this setting, it is possible, e.g., to keep the time gate at the position of the antenna con- nector while the antenna is measured at different length offsets.
  • Page 575 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Offset Embed Softtool ● CHANNEL – [OFFSET EMBED] > "One Way Loss" > "Fixture Compensation..." Background Information Refer to Chapter 5.6.1.5, "Fixture Compensation ", on page 187. Figure 6-49: Fixture Compensation dialog (for >4 ports) Since firmware version 2.94, the reference frequency for fixture data calculation is the user defined Freq for Loss...
  • Page 576 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Offset Embed Softtool Prompt for Each Port Determines how the R&S ZNB/ZNBT performs the sweeps for a given termination type (Open and/or Short; see "Measurement Type" on page 576). ● If unchecked, it performs the sweeps for Open/Short without interruption, implicitly assuming that all ports are terminated accordingly ●...

  • Page 577: One Way Loss Tab

    ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Offset Embed Softtool Figure 6-51: Measure Fixture dialog: Direct Compensation (and Prompt for Each Port) "Direct Compensation" data files are standard trace files, containing reflection parame- ter traces for the related port and standard: Table 6-4: Direct Compensation data Prompt for Each Port File Type Description...
  • Page 578 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Offset Embed Softtool Background information Refer to the following sections. ● Chapter 5.6, "Offset Parameters and De-/Embedding", on page 183 ● Chapter 5.6.1.2, "Definition of Loss Parameters ", on page 184 ● Chapter 5.6.1.4, "Auto Length and Loss", on page 186 ●...

  • Page 579: Single Ended Tab

    ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Offset Embed Softtool shift of a transmission parameter. See also Chapter 5.6.1.6, "Application and Effect of Offset Parameters ", on page 188. Remote command: [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:LOSS<PhyPt>:OFFSet [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:LOSS<PhyPt> [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:LOSS<PhyPt>:FREQuency Auto Length and Loss Determines the length offset and one-way loss parameters for the receive port of the active trace.
  • Page 580 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Offset Embed Softtool Figure 6-52: Offset Embed > Single Ended softtool left = 2 port data file selected for deembedding right = lumped element model selected for de-/embedding If the "Fixture Simulator" is disabled for the related channel (see "Fixture Simulator"...
  • Page 581 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Offset Embed Softtool ● The "2-Port Data" network is defined by means of an s2p file (see Select File...). For deembedding, the s2p file can also be generated by a third-party fixture model- ing tool (see "Fixture Tool"...

  • Page 582: Fixture Modeling Dialog

    ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Offset Embed Softtool Fixture Tool The "Fixture Tool" section is only available for deembedding 2-port data networks. Its controls allow you to select and run a third-party fixture modeling tool (see Chap- ter 6.13.5, "Fixture Modeling Dialog", on page 582) and to use its results for single- ended deembedding.
  • Page 583 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Offset Embed Softtool Figure 6-54: Fixture Modeling Dialog: ISD - Balanced Ports The dialogs for the available tools only differ in the available coupon types. The fixture modeling proceeds in the following steps: 1. Measure one or more test coupons for the related fixture; see Chapter 6.13.5.2, "Measure Coupon",...
  • Page 584 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Offset Embed Softtool Advanced Settings ... Opens the Advanced Settings dialog of the selected tool. See Chapter 6.13.5.5, "ISD Advanced Settings", on page 588 and Chapter 6.13.5.6, "SFD Advanced Settings", on page 592. Timestamp Filenames If checked, the names of subsequently generated "Test Coupon"...
  • Page 585 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Offset Embed Softtool Coupon Type Selects the coupon type to be measured. The following coupon types are supported: ● "Sym 2x Thru" ● "1x Open" ● "1x Short" ● "1x Open, 1x Short" (ISD only) Remote command: CALCulate:FMODel:ISD<Ph_pt>:COUPon:TYPE CALCulate:FMODel:SFD<Ph_pt>:COUPon:TYPE...
  • Page 586 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Offset Embed Softtool Remote command: CALCulate:FMODel:ISD<Ph_pt>:COUPon:MEASure:FILename CALCulate:FMODel:ISD<Ph_pt>:COUPon:MEASure:OPEN:FILename CALCulate:FMODel:ISD<Ph_pt>:COUPon:MEASure:SHORt:FILename CALCulate:FMODel:SFD<Ph_pt>:COUPon:MEASure:FILename Active Before starting to measure the test coupon, use these checkboxes to indicate the physical ports to which it is connected. Table 6-6: Allowed numbers of active ports "Sym 2x Thru"...
  • Page 587 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Offset Embed Softtool Active Before starting to Measure, use these checkboxes to indicate the physical ports to which DUT + test fixture are connected. For single-ended deembedding 2 ports must be active, for balanced deembedding 4 ports. Remote command: CALCulate:FMODel:ISD<Ph_pt>:DUT[:STATe] CALCulate:FMODel:SFD<Ph_pt>:DUT[:STATe]...
  • Page 588 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Offset Embed Softtool Note: ● If there are any errors in running the fixture deembedding tool, an error log of the tool is automatically presented in the default text editor (e.g., Notepad). ● For ISD first a batch task file config_znb.abt is created and then the tool is run in batch mode (see the ISD User Guide) Remote command: CALCulate:FMODel:ISD<Ph_pt>:RUN:RUN...
  • Page 589 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Offset Embed Softtool Test Coupons > Insertion Loss Tells the ISD tool about the linearity of the 2xThru test coupon: ● "Linear": linear insertion loss ● "Non-Linear" (default): non-linear insertion loss ● "Resonant": the 2x thru test coupon will be split and used directly for deembedding This option may be more accurate when the fixture and 2x Thru have the same impedance at every location.
  • Page 590 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Offset Embed Softtool Remote command: CALCulate:FMODel:ISD<Ph_pt>:SCALe:FTIMe Automatic Flt Tm for DUT + Lead Ins ← Lead Ins If checked (default) the flight time for DUT + lead-ins is calculated automatically. Other- wise it can be specified (see "Flt Tm for DUT + Lead Ins"...
  • Page 591 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Offset Embed Softtool Remote command: CALCulate:FMODel:ISD<Ph_pt>:PORT:SKIP:NONE CALCulate:FMODel:ISD<Ph_pt>:PORT:SKIP:LEFT CALCulate:FMODel:ISD<Ph_pt>:PORT:SKIP:RIGHt Ports to Skip (manual) ← DUT With Fixture Ports to Skip is set to "Manually set ports" this allows you to define the ports to be skipped. Enter the port numbers, separated by blanks (e.g. '1 3 4'). Remote command: CALCulate:FMODel:ISD<Ph_pt>:PORT:SKIP Calculations...
  • Page 592 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Offset Embed Softtool DC Extrapolation ← Calculations This setting is only active, if a recent version of the ISD tool (from 2019-12 or later) is used. If unchecked (default), the touchstone data of the generated deembedding file reach down to the start frequency of the instrument sweep.

  • Page 593: Port Sets Tab

    ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Offset Embed Softtool Adjust Impedance Mismatch If checked, the SFD tool performs automatic impedance adjustments. Remote command: on page 804 CALCulate:FMODel:SFD<Ph_pt>:AUTO 6.13.6 Port Sets Tab Selects transformation networks for deembedding/embedding arbitrary port sets, defines their parameters, assigns them to a port set and enables embedding. Use the complementary dock widget to create the required port sets and to activate or deactivate dembedding/embedding for selected port sets (see Chapter 6.13.1.4, "Port...
  • Page 594 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Offset Embed Softtool Port Set Port sets, defined in the complementary Port Sets Panel dock widget panel. The trans- formation networks are defined such that the physical analyzer test ports are connec- ted to the left of the circuit; the DUT ports are on the right side. You can define inde- pendent transformation networks for all port sets.

  • Page 595: Balanced Tab

    ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Offset Embed Softtool CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:PPAir:EMBedding<ListId>: PARameters:L<1|2|3> CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:PPAir:EMBedding<ListId>: PARameters:R<1|2|3> CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:PPAir:EMBedding<ListId>: PARameters:G<1|2|3> D1, D2 The "D1" (and "D2") buttons are enabled as long as the selected deembedding/embed- ding network is defined using Touchstone files. When loading a touchstone file, the analyzer by default assumes odd ports left (VNA side), even ports right (DUT side).
  • Page 596 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Offset Embed Softtool Figure 6-56: Offset Embed > Balanced softtool left = 4 port data file selected for de-/embedding right = other network selected for de-/embedding If the "Fixture Simulator" is disabled for the related channel (see "Fixture Simulator"...
  • Page 597 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Offset Embed Softtool symbol selects "no network" and disables deembedding/embedding for the selected balanced port. The 4-port data network (symbol "D1" only) is defined by means of an s4p file (see D2). For deembedding, the s4p file can also be generated by a third-party fixture mod- eling tool (see "Fixture Tool"...

  • Page 598: Ground Loop Tab

    ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Offset Embed Softtool Note: The loaded file is stored in the active recall set. Persisted recall sets contain the full (de-)embedding data so that they can be transferred to other instruments. Remote command: MMEMory:LOAD:VNETworks<Ch>:BALanced:DEEMbedding<LogPt> MMEMory:LOAD:VNETworks<Ch>:BALanced:EMBedding<LogPt> Fixture Tool The "Fixture Tool"...
  • Page 599 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Offset Embed Softtool ● If the "Fixture Simulator" is disabled for the related channel (see "Fixture Simulator" on page 506), this tab is inactive, i.e. all controls except the "Overview" button are grayed out. ● For a R&S ZNB without second internal source, the Overview "Overview"...

  • Page 600: Differential Match Tab

    ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Offset Embed Softtool CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:GLOop:DEEMbedding<group>: PARameters:R CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:GLOop:DEEMbedding<group>: PARameters:G CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:GLOop:EMBedding<group>: TNDefinition CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:GLOop:EMBedding<group>: PARameters:C CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:GLOop:EMBedding<group>: PARameters:L CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:GLOop:EMBedding<group>: PARameters:R CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:GLOop:EMBedding<group>: PARameters:G Select File... "Select File..." is enabled as long as the "1-Port Data" network is selected. This net- work is defined by its S-parameters stored in a one-port Touchstone file (*.s1p). No additional parameters are required.
  • Page 601 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Offset Embed Softtool Use the complementary dock widget to access the balanced port configuration and to activate or deactivate "Differential Match" embedding for selected balanced ports (see Chapter 6.13.1.8, "Differential Match Panel", on page 570). Background information Refer to Chapter 5.6.2.8, "Differential Match...

  • Page 602: Config Tab

    ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Offset Embed Softtool Network The graphical list contains the available 2-port networks for Differential Match embed- ding: ● symbol selects "no network" and disables differential match embedding for the selected balanced port. ● The "2-Port Data" network is defined by means of imported S-parameter data; see Select File...

  • Page 603: File Softtool

    ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT File Softtool = Default offset calculation Bottom = Offset calculation after de-/embedding (GUI mockup) Remote command: [SENSe:]CORRection:EDELay:VNETwork 6.14 File Softtool The "File" softtool allows you to work with recall sets and trace data. Access: SYSTEM – [FILE] User Manual 1173.9163.02 ─...

  • Page 604: Recall Sets Tab

    ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT File Softtool 6.14.1 Recall Sets Tab A recall set comprises a set of diagrams together with the underlying system, channel, trace and display settings. It can be stored to a VNA recall set file (*.znx|*.znxml). For background information, see Chapter 5.1.2, "Recall Sets",...
  • Page 605 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT File Softtool The R&S ZNB/ZNBT supports two recall set file formats ● znx (default) Binary file format, supported by all firmware versions of the R&S ZNB/ZNBT ● znxml XML based file format, introduced with the R&S ZNA; supported with firmware ver- sions 3.00 an higher Adds a new setup.
  • Page 606 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT File Softtool If the recall set to be loaded contains a switch matrix configuration and no differences to the current switch matrix configuration are detected, the recall set is loaded without further inquiry. Otherwise you are asked if you want to adapt the configuration: Select "Cancel"...
  • Page 607 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT File Softtool In the dialog proceed as follows: 1. Reassign Matrices: For each "Matrix in Recall Set", select a switch matrix of the same (driver) type as "Assigned Matrix". If no switch matrix of the same type exists, select "Switch Matrix" to open the Exter- nal Matrices Dialog that allows you to register/configure additional switch matrices.

  • Page 608: Favorites Tab

    ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT File Softtool 6.14.2 Favorites Tab The "Favorites" tab allows you to manage a list of favorite recall sets. A favorite is actually a path to the related recall set, i.e. ● if the recall set is modified, then the modified recall set is loaded the next time the favorite is selected ●...

  • Page 609: Print Tab

    ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT File Softtool 6.14.3 Print Tab The buttons on the "Print" tab allow you to send the diagrams of the active setup to an external printer, to a file or to the clipboard. Content and layout can be defined in the Printer Setup Dialog.
  • Page 610 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT File Softtool The HCOPy... commands provide the printer settings; see Chapter 8.3.7, "HCOPy Commands", on page 1010. 6.14.4.1 Content Tab The "Content" tab allows you to select the contents to be printed. The selected item in the "Print Charts" group specifies how the active recall set is prin- ted.

  • Page 611: Trace Data Tab

    ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT File Softtool ® Printers can be installed using the Windows "Devices and Printers" functionality; see also Chapter 4.1.9.4, "Connecting a Printer", on page 26. Print Options Selects the color scheme to be used for printing. Remote command: HCOPy:PAGE:COLor 6.14.4.3...

  • Page 612: Applic Softtool

    ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Applic Softtool Load Simulation Data... Imports previously stored trace data into the active diagram. The analyzer opens a dia- log box to select the file from all trace files (*.s?p, *.csv, *.dat) stored on the file system;...
  • Page 613 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Applic Softtool GPIB Explorer Opens a tool that allows you to connect to the analyzer, obtain an overview of all imple- mented remote control programs, test programs, compile and run test scripts. For a detailed description, refer to Chapter 7.1.3, "GPIB Explorer", on page 715.

  • Page 614: Tdr Application (R&S Znb/Znbt-K20)

    ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Applic Softtool Windows Explorer Opens the Windows Explorer and shows you the contents of the C:\Users\Public\Documents\Rohde-Schwarz\Vna\External Tools appli- cation shortcut directory. 6.15.2 TDR Application (R&S ZNB/ZNBT-K20) The "TDR" (Time Domain Reflectometry) application is provided by the Extended Time Domain Analysis option R&S ZNB/ZNBT-K20.
  • Page 615 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Applic Softtool The "TDR Setup" contains the following sections/controls: ● "Topology" Opens the "Balanced Ports" dialog that allows to configure the logical DUT ports (see Chapter 6.2.1.3, "Balanced Ports Dialog", on page 256) ● "Stimulus..." Opens the TDR Stimulus Settings Dialog that allows to configure the frequency...
  • Page 616 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Applic Softtool Controls in the TDR Stimulus Settings Dialog Figure 6-57: TDR Stimulus Settings dialog The "TDR Stimulus Settings" dialog offers basic settings. Instead of specifying the sweep parameters directly, they are derived from time domain properties of the DUT. After the settings are made, the resulting sweep parameters are shown in the dialog.
  • Page 617 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Applic Softtool Permittivity and velocity factor are coupled parameters, i.e. setting one of them deter- mines the other. A higher permittivity implies a smaller mechanical length, but leaves delay and electrical length unchanged (see Max. DUT Measure Delay / Max. El. Length / Max.
  • Page 618 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Applic Softtool Source/Receiver Settings The "RF Power" is the output power of the R&S ZNB stimulus, "IF Bandwidth" and "Average Factor" determine the operation of the related R&S ZNB/ZNBT receiver. For a description and related remote control commands see Chapter 6.9, "Power Bw Avg Softtool", on page 390.
  • Page 619 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Applic Softtool The available results depend on the selected Modulation: ● For NRZ modulated generator signals the result display comprises two separate info fields for "Basic" and "Time" results (see "Measurements..." on page 619). By default they are stacked below each other, however, they can be moved independ- ently like any other info field.
  • Page 620 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Applic Softtool For PAM signals these results are not available. For a description of the result values see "Eye Diagram Results" on page 212. Furthermore it is possible to change the Rise (and Fall) Time definition for the eye measurement from the standard 10–90% (90–10%) step to any other "Start Value"/"Stop Value"...
  • Page 621 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Applic Softtool For advanced configuration of the eye diagram simulation see Chapter 6.15.2.5, "Advanced Settings Dialog", on page 624 Measurement / Topology "Measurement" allows you to select an S-Parameter, i.e. the transmission (or reflec- tion) whose time domain properties shall be analyzed. The "Topology" to the right is updated accordingly.
  • Page 622 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Applic Softtool Load Bit Stream A user-defined bit stream can be loaded from file and is repeated until the configured Length is reached. If no pattern is loaded from file, the default pattern "10" is repeated instead.
  • Page 623 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Applic Softtool Remote command: CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:INPut:OLEVel CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:INPut:ZLEVel Low Pass Defines the signal shape of the simulated digital signal: toggles between ideal rectan- gular shape ("Low Pass" = disabled, default) and a more realistic shape ("Low Pass" = enabled).
  • Page 624 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Applic Softtool 6.15.2.5 Advanced Settings Dialog The "Advanced Settings" dialog gives full access to the calculation chain of the eye diagram simulation. Access: SYSTEM – [APPLIC] > "TDR" > "Eye Diag" > "Advanced Settings..." This dialog is available with Extended Time Domain Analysis option R&S ZNB/ZNBT- K20 only.
  • Page 625 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Applic Softtool This dialog is available with Extended Time Domain Analysis option R&S ZNB/ZNBT- K20 only. Simulated Bit Pattern / Simulated Rise Time Chapter 6.15.2.4, "Eye Diagram Dialog", on page 620 Modulation "Modulation" on page 622 High Level / Low Level "High Level / Low Level"...
  • Page 626 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Applic Softtool This dialog is available with Extended Time Domain Analysis option R&S ZNB/ZNBT- K20 only. In transmission systems known losses of the channel are typically compensated already in the transmitter. The most common setting is to boost high frequencies com- pared to low frequencies since the channels show typically larger losses for high fre- quencies.
  • Page 627 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Applic Softtool The FIR filter coefficients are found by solving the equations: – c – c = Va – c = Vb = Vc = Vd subject to the normalization condition | c | + | c | + | c | + | c | = 1.
  • Page 628 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Applic Softtool This dialog is available with Extended Time Domain Analysis option R&S ZNB/ZNBT- K20 only. Four types of jitter can be configured and selectively enabled: random, periodic, Dirac and user defined. If enabled, the jitter is added at the start of each symbol period, and its magnitude depends on the parameters specified in the dialog.
  • Page 629 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Applic Softtool CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:JITTer:PERiodic:FREQuency CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:JITTer:PERiodic:PHASe Dirac This type of jitter is specified by the amplitude in seconds ("Dirac Delta", positive or negative), as well as the probability of the jitter occurring at each symbol period ("Dirac Probability").
  • Page 630 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Applic Softtool This dialog is available with Extended Time Domain Analysis option R&S ZNB/ZNBT- K20 only. Active Enables/disables noise insertion. Remote command: CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:NOISe:STATe Defines the root mean square noise level. Remote command: CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:NOISe:RMS The "Define DUT" dialog allows you to switch between different transmission (and reflection) paths of the DUT and to configure its DC properties.
  • Page 631 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Applic Softtool Measurement / Topolgy "Measurement / Topology" on page 621 DC Value "DC Value" on page 315 Mode Allows you to switch temporarily between the real DUT (with measured frequency response) and an ideal one (with flat frequency response). Remote command: CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:DUT:MODE Equalization...
  • Page 632 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Applic Softtool CTLE Equalizer Specifies the parameters of the equalizer – a two-pole filter with single zero. With "DC Gain" ω ω s + ω angular frequencies ω = 2πf, the transfer function is given by: H ( s ) = Pole 1 Pole 2...
  • Page 633 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Applic Softtool Remote command: CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:MASK:STATe CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:MASK:DATA? CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:MASK:FAIL? Mask Fail Beep This checkbox determines whether the R&S ZNB/ZNBT should make an audible beep on mask failures. Note: In contrast to the R&S ZNB, the R&S ZNBT does not have a built-in audio device and loudspeaker.
  • Page 634 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Applic Softtool There are three mask areas that can be set up for the eye diagram test: center poly- gon, top rectangle, and bottom rectangle. Testing against these mask areas can be selectively enabled. Polygon Setup Allows you to define the center polygon and to activate it in the mask test.
  • Page 635 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Applic Softtool Figure 6-62: Center polygon setup: hexagon Figure 6-63: Center polygon setup: rectangle The polygon is centered at the Mask Center. Remote command: CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:MASK:SHAPe:POLYgon:STATe CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:MASK:SHAPe:POLYgon:TYPE CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:MASK:SHAPe:POLYgon:HORizontal CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:MASK:SHAPe:POLYgon:VERTical Top/Bottom Setup Defines and activates the top and bottom rectangles. Both rectangles are horizontally centered at the Mask Center and also their vertical off-...
  • Page 636 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Applic Softtool Test Settings Allows you to set the absolute or relative number of mask violations that will result in a mask fail condition. Remote command: CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:MASK:FAIL:CONDition CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:MASK:VIOLation:TOLerance CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:MASK:VIOLation:RATE Save / Load Mask Configuration Opens a dialog that allows to save/load the mask test configuration to/from a 7bit ASCII file (*.mask).
  • Page 637 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Applic Softtool 6.15.2.8 Rise Time Tab The "Rise Time" tab allows you to enable and configure the Rise Time Measurement. Access: SYSTEM – [APPLIC] > "TDR" > "Rise Time" Access: [APPLIC] key or "Application > Rise Time" menu Rise Time Enables/disables the rise time measurement.
  • Page 638 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Applic Softtool 6.15.2.9 Skew Tab The "Skew" tab allows you to enable and configure the Skew Measurement. Access: SYSTEM – [APPLIC] > "TDR" > "Skew" Skew Enables/disables the skew measurement between the active trace and the Reference Trace The skew measurement can only be performed if the following conditions are met for...
  • Page 639 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Applic Softtool Skew Position Defines the percentage of the step size that defines the position of the reference points on the current and the reference trace. The "Skew" value is the delta between the X coordinates of these reference points.
  • Page 640 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Applic Softtool Access: SYSTEM – [APPLIC] > "TDR" > "Time Gate" Since for the eye diagram, the time axis always equals two times the symbol time, the display of the time gate range lines ("Show Range Lines") does not make sense, and is therefore not available.

  • Page 641: Dut Centric Application

    ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Applic Softtool ● This tab is only visible if the Extended Time Domain Analysis option R&S ZNB/ ZNBT-K20 is available. ● If the active trace is represented as an eye diagram, the "X Axis Settings" are grayed out, as shown above.
  • Page 642 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Applic Softtool The "DUT Centric Wizard" lets you proceed with the followng steps: 1. Select the "DUT Type". Currently, this can be either "Mixer" or "Amplifier", where "Mixer" measurements require option R&S ZNB/ZNBT-K4 (see Chapter 5.7.4, "Frequency Conversion Measurements", on page 217).
  • Page 643 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Applic Softtool Guided Mixer Setup Define DUT The "Define DUT" page of the "DUT Centric Wizard" allows you to set up the basic properties of a mixer. Similar to the Mixer Configuration Dialog of the Manager.
  • Page 644 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Applic Softtool DUT/VNA Connections The "DUT/VNA Connections" page of the "DUT Sentric Wizard" allows you to configure the RF connections between VNA and DUT. Figure 6-66: Mixer/VNA connections User Manual 1173.9163.02 ─ 53...
  • Page 645 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Applic Softtool Figure 6-67: Amplifier/VNA connections Which connections are actually possible, depends on the number of ports (on the ana- lyzer and connected switch matrices) and the number of independent sources (on the and connected external generators).
  • Page 646 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Applic Softtool Depending on the "Measurement Selection" on page 645 either one, two, or three channels must be set up: ● one channel for S-parameter measurements ● one channel for intermodulation measurements Summary The "Summary" page of the "DUT Sentric Wizard" ●...
  • Page 647 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Applic Softtool Calibrate Newly Created Channels If you select "Calibrate Newly Created Channels", then on closing the "DUT Centric Wizard", the FW will create the channels and proceed with suitable calibrations. Guided Amplifier Setup Define DUT The "Define DUT"...
  • Page 648 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Applic Softtool Load from DUT Manager Use "Load from DUT Manager" to load a previously configured mixer from the DUT manager. This will open a dialog that allows you to select the DUT to be loaded: Save to DUT Manager Use "Save to DUT Manager"...
  • Page 649 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Applic Softtool Figure 6-68: Mixer/VNA connections Figure 6-69: Amplifier/VNA connections Which connections are actually possible, depends on the number of ports (on the ana- lyzer and connected switch matrices) and the number of independent sources (on the and connected external...
  • Page 650 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Applic Softtool Channel Settings The "Channel Settings" page allows you to change the measurement channel configu- ration proposed by the "DUT Centric Wizard" based on the properties of the DUT, the RF topology and the selected measurements. User Manual 1173.9163.02 ─...
  • Page 651 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Applic Softtool Depending on the "Measurement Selection" on page 645 either one, two, or three channels must be set up: ● one channel for S-parameter measurements ● one channel for intermodulation measurements Summary The "Summary" page of the "DUT Sentric Wizard" ●...
  • Page 652 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Applic Softtool Step 1: Channel Selection Chapter 6.11.1.2, "Channel Selection for Calibration Dialog", on page 417. The channel selection is shown, even if the active recall set contains only one channel. Step 2: Calibration Settings Defines power settings that apply to all subsequent calibrations and allows you to select some optional calibration steps.
  • Page 653 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Applic Softtool Data of completed calibrations are saved, data of incomplete calibrations are discar- ded. 6.15.3.2 DUT Manager Dialog The DUT manager allows you to create, configure, and manage DUTs. Access: ● SYSTEM – [APPLIC] > "Application: DUT Centric" > "DUT Manager..." ●...
  • Page 654 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Applic Softtool The DUT type "Mixer" is only availble if the instrument is equipped with software optionR&S ZNB/ZNBT-K4. See Chapter 5.7.4, "Frequency Conversion Measure- ments", on page 217. Allows you to create a user-defined DUT. Filter by DUT Type is set to a particular DUT type, a DUT of this type is created immediately.
  • Page 655 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Applic Softtool Access: DUT Manager Dialog > "Edit..." with a DUT of type "Amplifier" selected Mixer Configuration Dialog The "Mixer Configuration" dialog allows you to set up the fundamental properties of a mixer. Access: DUT Manager Dialog >...

  • Page 656: Display Softtool

    ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Display Softtool Embedded LO Select "Embedded LO" if in the related mixer measurement the LO cannot be provided by the VNA or a connected external generator. Setting this flag makes the LO drive power range read-only. Use Fixed Freq Uncheck "Use Fixed Freq"...
  • Page 657 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Display Softtool Active Diagram Selects the active diagram. Each recall set screen can display several diagrams simultaneously, each with a vari- able number of traces. One of these diagrams and traces is active at each time. The diagram number (or name) in the upper right corner of the active diagram is highligh- ted.
  • Page 658 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Display Softtool Delete Diagram Deletes the current diagram area including all traces displayed in the diagram area. The remaining diagrams are renumbered; each recall set always contains diagrams with contiguous numbers. "Delete Diag Area" is disabled if the recall set contains only one diagram area: In manual control, each recall set must contain at least one diagram area with one channel and one trace.

  • Page 659: Split Tab

    ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Display Softtool The active trace and active channel is highlighted. The scaling of the axes corresponds to the active trace. Tip: To hide all traces except one, activate the context menu of the respective trace name segment in the trace list and select "Hide all other Traces".
  • Page 660 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Display Softtool Some of the "Split" settings are also available in the Diagram Tab. Refer to the follow- ing sections: ● "Overlay All" on page 658 ● "Split All" on page 659 Dual Split / Triple Split / Quad Split Splits the diagram area into two (three / four) diagrams and distributes the traces among the diagrams.
  • Page 661 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Display Softtool Remote command: No command; display configuration only. Split Type The R&S ZNB/ZNBT provides the following split types: ● "Lineup": The diagrams are arranged side by side; each diagram occupies the entire screen height. ●...

  • Page 662: Config Tab

    ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Display Softtool 6.16.3 Config Tab Displays or hides controls and information elements of the screen and controls the appearance of the individual diagrams. Hiding the controls and information elements leaves more space for the diagrams. All elements can be shown or hidden simultaneously.
  • Page 663 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Display Softtool ● "Black and White Solid" sets a white background color. All traces and information elements in the diagram areas are black. All traces are drawn with solid lines. "User Define..." opens a dialog to modify the predefined schemes, changing the colors and styles of the individual display elements.
  • Page 664 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Display Softtool The info table is a possible container for info fields and can be placed to the bottom, to the left, or to the right of the screen. See also Chapter 6.7.8, "Info Field Tab", on page 382.
  • Page 665 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Display Softtool Element Selects the screen element to be modified. The list contains the background and all traces (more precisely trace properties), text elements and lines in the diagrams. The maximum number of trace properties can be configured in the "User Interface" tab of the "System Config"...
  • Page 666 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Display Softtool The different color reaches from the last passed measurement point before the start of the failed segment to the last failed measurement point in the segment. Consequently, the colorized trace segment can begin before the begin of the failed range and can end before its end.
  • Page 667 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Display Softtool General > Black White Scheme / Line Styles Scheme / Light Scheme Modifies the user color scheme, in particular the trace and channel lines, in a prede- fined way. As an alternative, select predefined color schemes; see "Color Scheme"...
  • Page 668 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Display Softtool Access: Info Window > "Configuration..." Use the "Info Field" combo box to select a marker or bandfilter search info field whose contents you want to display in parts or in total. It contains all info fields of the current recall set that are currently not displayed in the info table (see "Info Table: Show / Posi- tion"...

  • Page 669: View Bar Tab

    ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Display Softtool 6.16.4 View Bar Tab Displays or hides information panels and bars of the graphical user interface. Hiding the information elements leaves more space for the diagrams. All elements can be shown or hidden simultaneously. Menu Bar Toggles the visibility of the "Menu Bar".

  • Page 670: Touchscreen Tab

    ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Setup Softtool For background information, see Chapter 4.3.2.2, "Toolbar", on page 52. Remote command: SYSTem:DISPlay:BAR:TOOLs[:STATe] Additional Function: Minimize/Mazimize the Softtool Panel The softtool panel can be minimized/maximized via the "X"/hamburger icon in its top right corner. Remote command: SYSTem:DISPlay:BAR:STOols[:STATe] 6.16.5 Touchscreen Tab...

  • Page 671: Setup Tab

    ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Setup Softtool Persistent vs. session settings The settings in the "Setup" softtool and the configuration dialogs are global settings and not affected by a "Preset" or shutdown of the analyzer. 6.17.1 Setup Tab Gives access to system-wide properties, settings, resources and service functions. 6.17.1.1 Controls on the Setup Tab The following buttons in the "Setup"...
  • Page 672 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Setup Softtool Remote Encoding Selects the character encoding used at the remote interface. The selected encoding applies to directory and file names, calibration kit names, calibration unit characteriza- tions and display titles. Currently the following encodings are supported: ANSI (default), UTF-8, Shift JIS. Remote command: SYSTem:COMMunicate:CODec 6.17.1.2...
  • Page 673 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Setup Softtool Preset Scope Defines whether a preset affects all open recall sets ("Instrument") or the active recall set only. The "Preset Scope" applies to the GUI and to the com- SYSTem:PRESet[:DUMMy] mand. The *RST command always resets all open recall sets. Remote command: SYSTem:PRESet:SCOPe Remote Preset Configuration...

  • Page 674: Calibration Tab

    ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Setup Softtool Furthermore, the user preset file is used as a template, whenever recall set files are created from the GUI. Remote command: SYSTem:PRESet:USER:NAME SYSTem:PRESet:USER[:STATe] Start in Preset If this option is active, the R&S ZNB/ZNBT FW always starts with the configured Preset Configuration.
  • Page 675 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Setup Softtool Auto Averaging Activates automatic averaging, which means that the VNA performs multiple calibration sweeps and applies averaging to reduce trace noise. In contrast to regular averaging (see Chapter 6.9.3, "Average Tab", on page 391), the number of calibration sweeps is calculated automatically.

  • Page 676: User Interface Tab

    ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Setup Softtool Use the special directory to make sure that you do not have to import kits manually, even after terminating the VNA application improperly. In this case, previously imported cal kit files are not stored in the recall set file. Remote command: MMEMory:LOAD:CKIT:UDIRectory User Interface Tab...
  • Page 677 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Setup Softtool Remote command: n.a. Use Default Tab for Hardkey If the checkbox is selected (system default), the Function Keys activate the first enabled tab of their associated softtool. Otherwise the last used tab is activated. For background information, see Chapter 6.1, "Function Keys and Softtools",...

  • Page 678: Messages Tab

    ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Setup Softtool Units Prefix Sets the unit prefix for frequencies (Base unit: Hz) to kilo (k), mega (M), giga (G) or tera (T) or lets the R&S ZNB/ZNBT select the appropriate prefix ("Auto" = default set- ting).

  • Page 679: Channel Bits Tab

    ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Setup Softtool Show Remote Error Info Messages Defines whether information popups are displayed whenever a remote control com- mand error occurs. The displayed information can be useful for program development and optimization; it does not necessarily indicate that a remote control script is faulty or non-executable. Note ●...

  • Page 680: Advanced Tab

    ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Setup Softtool Pin 16 - 19 Selects the control mechanism for the signals at pins 16 to 19 of the USER PORT con- nector. ● "Channel Bits": Signals are controlled by channel bits 4 to 7. No drive port indica- tion at the USER PORT connector.

  • Page 681: Power Tab

    ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Setup Softtool Touchstone Export Options Configures whitespace insertion during Touchstone file export. The default export format is explained in Chapter 5.4.2.1, "Touchstone Files", on page 142: ● logical columns are vertically aligned using spaces ● positive and negative numbers are vertically aligned by prefixing positive numbers with blanks ●...
  • Page 682 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Setup Softtool Power Keep Settling Delay Auto Reduce End Measurement Restart Sweep Time Figure 6-72: Power control at sweep end in Single Sweep mode (power sweep) Note: By default, at sweep end the output power of the first measurement point is restored ("Auto"...

  • Page 683: Recovery Tab

    ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Setup Softtool Settling Delay / Reset Delay ← Power Reduction at Sweep End Power Mode at Sweep End is set to "Reduce" or "Keep", the "Settling Delay" defines the time between Restart Sweep request and sweep start. See Figure 6-72 for an illus- tration.
  • Page 684 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Setup Softtool Common Controls in the Info Dialog The "Save...", "Print... ", and "Save Report" buttons at the bottom of the "Info" dialog allow you to save the contents of the open tab to a file or to create a hardcopy. Save...
  • Page 685 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Setup Softtool Software Option Info Software options are listed with their name and description, the option key and key type, and the activation and expiration date (if applicable). Remote command: DIAGnostic:PRODuct:OPTion:INFO? Hardware Tab Gives an overview of the analyzer's hardware configuration and basic hardware-related instrument settings.
  • Page 686 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Setup Softtool Selftest Tab Displays the result of the automatic selftest of the analyzer. Error Log Tab Contains a chronological record of errors that occurred in the current and in previous sessions (see Chapter 10.1, "Errors during Firmware Operation", on page 1373).

  • Page 687: Freq. Ref. Tab

    ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Setup Softtool 6.17.2 Freq. Ref. Tab Selects a reference signal for synchronization between the R&S ZNB/ZNBT and exter- nal devices. A common reference frequency is advisable to ensure frequency accuracy and frequency stability in the test setup. State Indicates the state of the internal phase locked loop: If the frequencies are properly synchronized, the state is "locked".
  • Page 688 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Setup Softtool 6.17.3.1 Controls on the Remote Settings Tab IP Address Displays the current IP4 address of the R&S ZNB/ZNBT. By default, the analyzer is configured to use dynamic TCP/IP configuration (DHCP) and obtain all IP address information automatically.
  • Page 689 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Setup Softtool Remote command: SYSTem:LANGuage Define *IDN + *OPT... Defines a format for the ID string and the option string of the analyzer. The default strings are automatically adjusted to the selected "Remote Language". The strings can be queried via *IDN? and *OPT?, respectively.

  • Page 690: External Devices Tab

    ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Setup Softtool Remote command: SYSTem:COMMunicate:GPIB[:SELF]:INIT:WAIT SYSTem:COMMunicate:GPIB[:SELF]:LPORt:ALIGn SYSTem:COMMunicate:GPIB[:SELF]:DCLear:SUPPress Instrument Messages... Opens the System Configuration dialog with the Messages Tab selected. From there you can configure the display of instrument messages as information popups, in partic- ular the display of remote control command errors. 6.17.4 External Devices Tab Allows you to set up and configure external power meters, generators and calibration units and to enable error logging for the current session.
  • Page 691 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Setup Softtool The buttons in the "External Devices" panel open the following dialogs: ● "Power Meters...", see Chapter 6.17.4.2, "External Power Meters Dialog", on page 691 ● "Power Meter Config...", see Chapter 6.17.4.3, "External Power Meter Config Dia- log", on page 695 This button is active only if at least one external power meter is online (physically...
  • Page 692 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Setup Softtool The configuration of a new external power meter involves the following steps: 1. Connect the power meter to your R&S ZNB/ZNBT using a LAN (VXI-11), GPIB, or USB interface. 2. If the power meter is connected via LAN, enable LAN Detection 3.
  • Page 693 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Setup Softtool Configured Devices Table with all power meters in use with their properties. Except for the auto-detected Known Devices, to appear in the table of "Configured Devices" a power sensor/meter must have been configured manually using Device.
  • Page 694 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Setup Softtool LAN Detection Activate "LAN Detection" to include the LAN interface in the autodetection sequence (see Scan Instruments). Note: "LAN detection" only works for external devices on the IP subnet with the R&S ZNB/ZNBT. As a prerequisite, the R&S ZNB/ZNBT must accept incoming connections on UDP port 2473.
  • Page 695 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Setup Softtool Table 6-7: Interface types for external power meters and address formats Physical Interface Address Remarks interface (protocol) (connector) VXI-11 <IpAddress> Full VISA resource string: for example 10.11.12.13 TCPIP[board]::<Address>[::INSTR] SOCKET <IpAddress>::<PortNo> LAN connection with pure TCP/IP protocol; refer to your VISA user documentation.
  • Page 696 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Setup Softtool Deembed Two-Port (All Channels) Reads and modifies the state of the built-in S-parameter correction that is available on certain R&S®NRP-Z power sensors. See Application Note 1GP70 "Using S-Parame- ters with R&S®NRP-Z Power Sensors" for background information. This Application Note is available on the Rohde &...
  • Page 697 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Setup Softtool If the R&S ZNB/ZNBT fails to detect a connected generator, ► Click "Add Device" to define the interface type and address. The R&S ZNB/ZNBT can auto-detect the instrument type (driver) and the serial number of the connected generator.
  • Page 698 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Setup Softtool In this case, check whether the device is properly connected to the configured interface. – Self test error In this case enable error logging for external devices (see "Log Errors" on page 691), and search the Error Log Tab for self test error codes of the device.
  • Page 699 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Setup Softtool ● "Interface" selects an interface/protocol type for the connection. In addition to the GPIB, VXI-11, SOCKET, and USB-VISA interface types (for devices connected to the GPIB Bus, LAN or USB connectors of the analyzer; see Table 6-8), the ana- lyzer supports any "Other"...

  • Page 700: External Ports Tab

    ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Setup Softtool Physical Interface Address Remarks interface (protocol) (connector) USB-VISA <ManID>::<ProdID>::<SerialNo> 2733 (0x0AAD) is the manufacturer ID of Rohde & Schwarz. e.g. 0x0AAD::0x0047::100098 71 (0x0047) is an example for a R&S prod- uct ID (R&S SMF100A). The serial number is device-specific.
  • Page 701 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Setup Softtool "RF Connections" is enabled if at least one switch matrix is configured. Optimization Allows you to select between different switch matrix routing optimizations: ● "Speed" – switch as little as possible ● "Precision" – always use the best possible route in terms of quality ("priority") Chapter 5.7.22.4, "Multiple Paths: Precision vs.
  • Page 702 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Setup Softtool The registration of a new external switch matrix typically involves the following steps: 1. connect the switch matrix to your R&S ZNB/ZNBT using LAN or USB interface. 2. If the switch matrix is connected via LAN, enable "LAN detection". 3.
  • Page 703 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Setup Softtool Known Devices Table with the discovered switch matrices. "Scan Instruments" refreshes the table; copies a discovered switch matrix to the table of "Configured Devices". Remote command: Configured Devices Table displaying the registered switch matrices. A distinction is made between those switch matrices that are used in RF connections (see Chapter 6.17.5.5, "Switch Matrix RF Connections...
  • Page 704 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Setup Softtool When using the NI-VISA library, ensure that the network analyzer itself is not listed as a network device in the Measurement & Automation Explorer. Otherwise, "Scan Instru- ments" will send an identification query (*IDN?), causing the analyzer to close the "External Switch Matrix"...
  • Page 705 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Setup Softtool Remote command: SYSTem:COMMunicate:RDEVice:SMATrix<Matr>:DEFine SYSTem:COMMunicate:RDEVice:SMATrix<Matr>:SERial? Delete All Unregisters all switch matrices, automatically deleting all switch matrix RF connections. Remote command: SYSTem:COMMunicate:RDEVice:SMATrix:DELete 6.17.5.4 Device LAN Configuration Dialog The "Device LAN Configuration" dialog allows to read and modify the "IP Configura- tion"...
  • Page 706 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Setup Softtool simply use "Copy from local network" to copy the "Subnet Mask" and "Standard Gate- way" from the analyzer's IP settings. 6.17.5.5 Switch Matrix RF Connections Dialog The "Switch Matrix RF Connections" dialog allows you to define the RF connections between the VNA and the switch matrices and the RF connections to the (DUT) test ports.
  • Page 707 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Setup Softtool The definition of the RF connections typically involves the following steps: 1. "Add" one or more switching matrices These matrices must have been registered before; see Chapter 6.17.5.3, "External Matrices Dialog", on page 701 for details. 2.
  • Page 708 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Setup Softtool Select some matrices and tap "OK" to remove them from the RF connection configura- tion or tap "Cancel" to quit the dialog without removing a switch matrix from the RF connection configuration. Delete All Opens a confirmation dialog Either tap "OK"...
  • Page 709 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Setup Softtool In the "Edit" dialog select the appropriate VNA port or tap "Set Unused" to delete the VNA port association. Remote command: SYSTem:COMMunicate:RDEVice:SMATrix<Matr>:CONFigure:MVNA SYSTem:COMMunicate:RDEVice:SMATrix<Matr>:CONFigure:MLVNa Edit Test Port Connection To edit a test port connection, tap on the corresponding port symbol. In the "Edit"...

  • Page 710: Help Softtool

    ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Help Softtool Remote command: SYSTem:COMMunicate:RDEVice:SMATrix<Matr>:CONFigure:MTESt SYSTem:COMMunicate:RDEVice:SMATrix<Matr>:CONFigure:MLTest SYSTem:COMMunicate:RDEVice:SMATrix:CONFigure:TVNA 6.18 Help Softtool The "Help" softtool presents the functions of the menu bar's "Help" menu, except call- ing context sensitive help. Access: "Help" – "Contents..." | "Index..." | "About..." from the menu bar. Contents...

  • Page 711: Additional Function Keys

    ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Additional Function Keys Open the Info Dialog for full information about the instrument. 6.19 Additional Function Keys The SYSTEM hardkey panel also provides the Windows®, [HELP] and [PRESET] keys that do not open a softtool but perform an immediate action. The DATA ENTRY panel provides hardkeys for undo and redo.
  • Page 712 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Additional Function Keys In the Toolbar, the corresponding icons are disabled (grayed out) if an undo or redo is not possible. In general, the undo and redo actions are disabled if the size of the active recall set file exceeds 1 MB.

  • Page 713: Remote Control

    ® Remote Control R&S ZNB/ZNBT Introduction to Remote Control 7 Remote Control This chapter provides instructions on how to set up the analyzer for remote control, a general introduction to remote control of programmable instruments, and the descrip- tion of the analyzer's remote control concept. For reference information about all remote control commands implemented by the instrument, complemented by compre- hensive program examples, refer to Chapter 8, "Command...

  • Page 714: Remote Control Via Usb

    ® Remote Control R&S ZNB/ZNBT Introduction to Remote Control HiSLIP protocol The HiSLIP (High Speed LAN Instrument Protocol) is a protocol for TCP-based instru- ments specified by the IVI foundation. Compared to its predecessor VXI-11, it provides speed and other improvements. HiSLIP is encapsulated in VISA; the resource string reads TCPIP::<R&S ZNB/ZNBT IP address>::hislip0.

  • Page 715: Gpib Explorer

    ® Remote Control R&S ZNB/ZNBT Introduction to Remote Control Example controller programs can be obtained from the Rohde & Schwarz support cen- ters. However, it can be preferable to integrate the controller program into post-pro- cessing tools (e.g. Microsoft Excel) to list, draw, or manipulate the measured values retrieved from the analyzer.

  • Page 716: Switchover To Remote Control

    ® Remote Control R&S ZNB/ZNBT Introduction to Remote Control ● GPIB address (for connection to controllers equipped with a National Instruments GPIB interface using the GPIB bus connector) ● RSIB, VISA (TCPIP) and VISA (HSLIP) (for LAN connection, requires an appropri- ate IP or local host address);...
  • Page 717 ® Remote Control R&S ZNB/ZNBT Introduction to Remote Control VXI-11 protocol, the alternative commands @REM and @LOC can be used to switch from manual to remote control and back. While remote control is active, operation via the front panel is disabled except the "Remote"...
  • Page 718 ® Remote Control R&S ZNB/ZNBT Introduction to Remote Control Switching on the display is ideal for program test purposes but tends to slow down the measurement. Therefore, it is recommended to switch off the display in real measure- ment applications where a tested program script is to be executed repeatedly. The analyzer provides a third display option where the measurement screen is only updated when triggered by the remote control command SYSTem:DISPlay:UPDate ONCE.

  • Page 719: Combining Manual And Remote Control

    ® Remote Control R&S ZNB/ZNBT Introduction to Remote Control control. For remote control, addresses 0 through 30 are permissible. The GPIB address is maintained after a reset of the instrument settings. SCPI commands: SYSTem:COMMunicate:GPIB[:SELF]:ADDRess 7.1.4.2 Returning to Manual Operation Return to manual operation can be initiated via the front panel or via remote control. ●...

  • Page 720: Messages

    ® Remote Control R&S ZNB/ZNBT Messages 7.2 Messages The messages transferred on the data lines of the GPIB bus or via the RSIB / VXI-11 protocol can be either interface messages or device messages. For a description of interface messages refer to the relevant sections: ●...
  • Page 721 ® Remote Control R&S ZNB/ZNBT Messages SCPI compatibility The analyzers are compatible to the final SCPI version 1999.0. Not all the commands supported by the instrument are taken from the SCPI standard (Standard Commands for Programmable Instruments), however, their syntax follows SCPI rules. The SCPI standard is based on standard IEEE 488.2 and aims at the standardization of instru- ment-control commands, error handling and the status registers.
  • Page 722 ® Remote Control R&S ZNB/ZNBT Messages The following rules simplify and abbreviate the command syntax: ● Multiple mnemonics Some mnemonics occur on several levels within one command system. Their effect depends on the structure of the command, i. e. on the position in the com- mand header they are inserted in.
  • Page 723 ® Remote Control R&S ZNB/ZNBT Messages Several commands in a command line must be separated by a semicolon ;". If the next command belongs to a different command system, the semicolon is followed by a colon. Example: TRIGger:SOURce EXTernal;:SENSe:FREQuency:STARt 1GHZ This command line contains two commands.

  • Page 724: Scpi Parameters

    ® Remote Control R&S ZNB/ZNBT Messages Example: TRIGger:SOURce? Response: IMM 7.2.3 SCPI Parameters Many commands are supplemented by a parameter or a list of parameters. The parameters must be separated from the header by a "white space". Permissible parameters are numerical values, Boolean parameters, text, character strings and block data.
  • Page 725 ® Remote Control R&S ZNB/ZNBT Messages Unless it is explicitly stated in the command description, you can use the special numeric parameters for all commands of the analyzer. 7.2.3.2 Boolean Parameters Boolean parameters represent two states. The ON state (logically true) is represented by ON or a numerical value different from 0.

  • Page 726: Basic Remote Control Concepts

    ® Remote Control R&S ZNB/ZNBT Basic Remote Control Concepts 7.2.3.6 Overview of Syntax Elements The colon separates the mnemonics of a command. In a command line, the separating semicolon marks the uppermost command level. The semicolon separates two commands of a command line. It does not alter the path. The comma separates several parameters of a command.

  • Page 727: Active Traces In Remote Control

    ® Remote Control R&S ZNB/ZNBT Basic Remote Control Concepts The following frequently used commands create and delete traces, channels, and dia- gram areas: Create new trace and new channel CALCulate<Ch>:PARameter:SDEFine '<Trace Name>','< Meas Parameter> (if channel <Ch> does not exist yet) Delete trace CALCulate<Ch>:PARameter:DELete '<Trace Name>'...

  • Page 728: Initiating Measurements, Speed Considerations

    ® Remote Control R&S ZNB/ZNBT Basic Remote Control Concepts ● The active traces for manual and remote control may be different. The following program example illustrates how to create, select and reference traces. It is instructive to observe the analyzer screen in order to check the effect of each step. Example: *RST Reset the analyzer, creating channel no.

  • Page 729: Addressing Traces And Channels

    ® Remote Control R&S ZNB/ZNBT Basic Remote Control Concepts The following command sequence performs a single sweep in a single channel. Example: *RST; :INITiate:CONTinuous:ALL OFF Activate single sweep mode for all channels (including the channels created later). INITiate1:IMMediate; *WAI Start a single sweep in channel no. 1, wait until the sweep is terminated before pro- ceeding to the next command (see Chapter 7.4, "Command Processing",...

  • Page 730: Command Processing

    ® Remote Control R&S ZNB/ZNBT Command Processing Method Commands / Example Assign or query trace name of a trace numbered CONFigure:TRACe<Trc>:NAME 'ABCD' <Trc> CONFigure:TRACe<Trc>:NAME? (returns 'ABCD') Query trace number assigned to a trace named CONFigure:TRACe<Trc>:NAME:ID? 'ABCD' 'ABCD' (returns the actual trace number; the trace suffix is ignored) Table 7-3: Mixed commands Method...

  • Page 731: Command Recognition

    ® Remote Control R&S ZNB/ZNBT Command Processing nition when the input buffer is full or when it receives a delimiter, <PROGRAM MESSAGE TERMINATOR>, as defined in IEEE 488.2, or the interface message DCL. If the input buffer is full, the message data traffic is stopped and the data received up to then is processed.

  • Page 732: Status Reporting System

    ® Remote Control R&S ZNB/ZNBT Command Processing Before passing on the data to the hardware, the settling bit in the STATus:OPERation register is set (see Chapter 7.5.3.4, "STATus:OPERation", on page 740). The hard- ware executes the settings and resets the bit again as soon as the new state has set- tled.
  • Page 733 ® Remote Control R&S ZNB/ZNBT Command Processing :FREQ:STAR 1GHZ;SPAN 100 :FREQ:STAR? always returns 1000000000 (1 GHz). When: :FREQ:STAR 1GHz;STAR?;SPAN 1000000 is sent, however, the result is not specified by SCPI. The result could be the value of STARt before the command was sent since the instrument might defer executing the individual commands until a program message terminator is received.

  • Page 734: Status Reporting System

    ® Remote Control R&S ZNB/ZNBT Status Reporting System Command Action after the hardware has settled Programming the controller *WAI Stops further command processing until all commands Send *WAI directly after the command which sent before *WAI have been executed should be terminated before the next command is executed.

  • Page 735: Overview Of Status Registers

    ® Remote Control R&S ZNB/ZNBT Status Reporting System SRE register The service request enable register SRE can be used as ENABle part of the STB if the STB is structured according to SCPI. By analogy, the ESE can be used as the ENABle part of the ESR.
  • Page 736 ® Remote Control R&S ZNB/ZNBT Status Reporting System most significant bit) is set to zero for all parts. Thus the contents of the register parts can be processed by the controller as positive integer. The sum bit is obtained from the EVENt and ENABle part for each register. The result is then entered into a bit of the CONDition part of the higher-order register.

  • Page 737: Contents Of The Status Registers

    ® Remote Control R&S ZNB/ZNBT Status Reporting System NTRansition The Negative TRansition part also acts as a transition filter. When a bit of the CONDi- tion part is changed from 1 to 0, the associated NTR bit decides whether the EVENt bit is set to 1.
  • Page 738 ® Remote Control R&S ZNB/ZNBT Status Reporting System ● The STATus:QUEStionable:LIMit<1|2> register indicates the result of the limit check. ● The STATus:QUEStionable:INTegrity register monitors hardware failures of the analyzer. 7.5.3.1 STB and SRE The STatus Byte (STB) provides a rough overview of the instrument status by collect- ing the pieces of information of the lower registers.
  • Page 739 ® Remote Control R&S ZNB/ZNBT Status Reporting System Bit No. Meaning MSS bit (master status summary bit) This bit is set if the instrument triggers a service request. This is the case if one of the other bits of this register is set together with its mask bit in the service request enable reg- ister SRE.
  • Page 740 ® Remote Control R&S ZNB/ZNBT Status Reporting System Bit No. Meaning Operation Complete This bit is set on receipt of the command *OPC after all previous commands have been executed. Query Error This bit is set if either the controller wants to read data from the instrument without having sent a query, or if it does not fetch requested data and sends new instructions to the instru- ment instead.
  • Page 741 ® Remote Control R&S ZNB/ZNBT Status Reporting System Bit No. Meaning INTegrity register summary This bit is set if a bit is set in the STATus:QUEStionable:INTegrity register and the associ- ated ENABle bit is set to 1. LIMit register summary This bit is set if a bit is set in the STATus:QUEStionable:LIMit1 register and the associated ENABle bit is set to 1.
  • Page 742 ® Remote Control R&S ZNB/ZNBT Status Reporting System to the order of traces in the response string of the CALCulate<Ch>:PARameter:CATalog? query. ● The number of traces monitored cannot exceed 16. If a setup contains more traces, the newest traces are not monitored. STATus:QUEStionable:INTegrity...
  • Page 743 ® Remote Control R&S ZNB/ZNBT Status Reporting System Bit No. Meaning Receiver overload protection tripped This bit is set if the analyzer detects an excessive input level at one of the ports. If this condition persists, all internal and external generators are switched off. Reduce RF input level at the port.

  • Page 744: Application Of The Status Reporting System

    ® Remote Control R&S ZNB/ZNBT Status Reporting System Bit No. Meaning Overload at DC MEAS This bit is set if the input voltage at one of the DC input connectors on the rear panel is too high. Reduce the input voltage. Power settings exceed hardware limits This bit is set if the source power at one of the test ports is too high or too low.
  • Page 745 ® Remote Control R&S ZNB/ZNBT Status Reporting System 2. Set bit 5 in the SRE (ESB). 3. Insert *OPC in the command sequence (e.g. at the end of a sweep) As soon as all commands preceding *OPC have been completed, the instrument gen- erates an SRQ.
  • Page 746 ® Remote Control R&S ZNB/ZNBT Status Reporting System The serial poll is mainly used to obtain a fast overview of the state of several instru- ments connected to the controller. 7.5.4.3 Parallel Poll In a parallel poll, up to eight instruments are simultaneously requested by the controller by means of a single command to transmit 1 bit of information each on the data lines, i.e., to set the data line allocated to each instrument to a logical "0"...

  • Page 747: Reset Values Of The Status Reporting System

    ® Remote Control R&S ZNB/ZNBT Status Reporting System 7.5.4.5 Error Queue Each error state in the instrument leads to an entry in the error queue. The entries of the error queue are detailed plain text error messages that can be queried via remote control using or SYSTem:ERRor:ALL?.

  • Page 748: Command Reference

    ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Special Terms and Notation 8 Command Reference This chapter describes all common commands and SCPI commands implemented by the analyzer. Validity of the command set The commands reported in this chapter are valid for vector network analyzers with any number of ports.

  • Page 749: Upper/Lower Case

    ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Special Terms and Notation 8.1.1 Upper/Lower Case Upper/lower case characters characterize the long and short form of the mnemonics in a command. The short form consists of all uppercase characters, the long form of all uppercase plus all lowercase characters.

  • Page 750: Common Commands

    ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Common Commands The analyzer provides numeric suffixes for channels, traces, ports, markers etc. If unspecified, a numeric suffix is replaced by 1. The number of ports depends on the analyzer model. No restrictions apply to number of markers, channel, trace, and diagram suffixes.

  • Page 751: Scpi Command Reference

    ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference Command Parameters / Remarks Short Description *OPT? – Queries the options included in the instrument and returns a list of the options installed. The response consists of arbitrary ASCII response data according to OPTion identification query only IEEE 488.2.

  • Page 752: Calculate Commands

    ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference ● MMEMory Commands..................1020 ● OUTPut Commands....................1062 ● PROGram Commands..................1067 ● [SENSe:] Commands..................1070 ● SOURce Commands...................1205 ● STATus Commands.................... 1253 ● SYSTem Commands...................1256 ● TRACe Commands..................... 1298 ● TRIGger Commands................... 1301 8.3.1 CALCulate Commands The CALCulate...
  • Page 753 ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference Data format The trace data is transferred in either ASCII or block data (REAL) format, depending on the setting. If block data format is used, it is recommended to FORMat[:DATA] select EOI as a receive terminator (SYSTem:COMMunicate:GPIB[:SELF]: RTERminator EOI).
  • Page 754 ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference Return values: <Data> Response values either in ASCII or block data format, depend- ing on the current setting. FORMat[:DATA] Example: Analogous to CALCulate:DATA:DALL?; see CALCulate<Chn>:DATA. Usage: Query only CALCulate:DATA:TRACe <TraceName>, <Format>, <Data>... The query gets the trace data of an arbitrary (not necessarily the active) trace, refer- enced by its trace name <TraceName>.

  • Page 755: Calculate:Data:call

    ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference Note ● Importing data is only supported in single sweep mode (INITiate<Ch>: CONTinuous OFF) ● Before importing data, the channel must be configured with the same settings that were used during export (user calibration, balanced port configuration, stimulus axis etc.).

  • Page 756: Calculate:Data:channel:all

    ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference CALCulate<Ch>:DATA:CHANnel:ALL? <Format> Reads the current response values of all traces of the selected channel. Suffix: <Ch> Channel number Query parameters: <Format> FDATa | SDATa | MDATa Output format for the S-parameter data, see CALCulate<Chn>:DATA.

  • Page 757: Calculate:Data

    ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference Suffix: <Ch> Channel number of the previously defined S-parameter group. Query parameters: <Format> FDATa | SDATa | MDATa Output format for the S-parameter data, see on page 757. CALCulate<Chn>:DATA Example: CALCulate<Ch>:PARameter:DEFine:SGRoup Usage: Query only CALCulate<Chn>:DATA <Format>, <Data>...
  • Page 758 ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference Example: *RST; SWE:POIN 20 Create a trace with 20 sweep points, making the created trace the active trace of channel 1 (omitted optional mnemonic SENSe1). CALC:DATA? FDAT Query the 20 response values of the created trace. In the FDATa setting, 20 comma-separated ASCII values are returned.
  • Page 759 ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference MDATa Unformatted trace data (see SDATa) after evaluation of trace mathematics. [Data access point 5] NCData Factory calibrated trace data: the values are obtained right after applying the fac- tory calibration but before applying a user-defined calibration (if any). [Data access point 1] UCData Uncalibrated trace data.

  • Page 760: Calculate:Data:nsweep[:Last]

    ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference CALCulate<Chn>:DATA:NSWeep[:LAST]? <Format>, <RvCount> Reads the response values of a trace acquired in single sweep mode (INITiate<Ch>:CONTinuous OFF). The trace can be any of the traces acquired dur- ing the single sweep cycle. Tip: ●...
  • Page 761 ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference Example: CALCulate<Chn>:DATA:NSWeep:FIRSt? Usage: Query only CALCulate<Chn>:DATA:NSWeep:FIRSt? <Format>, <FwCount>[, <FwCountEnd>] Reads the response values of a trace or a consecutive group of traces acquired in sin- gle sweep mode (INITiate<Ch>:CONTinuous OFF). Tip: This command can only be used for >...

  • Page 762: Calculate:Data:stimulus

    ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference CALCulate<Chn>:DATA:STIMulus? Reads the stimulus values of the active data or memory trace. Suffix: <Chn> Channel number used to identify the active trace Example: CALCulate<Chn>:DATA Usage: Query only 8.3.1.3 CALCulate:DLINe... The CALCulate:DLINe... commands control the horizontal line used to mark and retrieve response values (display line).
  • Page 763 ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference 8.3.1.4 CALCulate:DTIMe... Defines the properties and retrieves the results of the skew measurement provided with the Extended Time Domain Analysis option R&S ZNB/ZNBT-K20..................763 CALCulate<Chn>:DTIMe:DATA? ................763 CALCulate<Chn>:DTIMe:LIMit:FAIL? ............... 764 CALCulate<Chn>:DTIMe:LIMit:FAIL:BEEP ................
  • Page 764 ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference Suffix: <Chn> Channel number used to identify the active trace Return values: <Boolean> 0 – skew check has passed 1 – skew check has failed Usage: Query only Options: R&S ZNB/ZNBT-K20 CALCulate<Chn>:DTIMe:LIMit:FAIL:BEEP <Boolean> Defines whether the R&S ZNB/ZNBT should make an audible beep on skew limit viola- tions.
  • Page 765 ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference Manual operation: "Skew Check On" on page 639 CALCulate<Chn>:DTIMe:POSition <SkewPos> Defines the position of the skew measurement. Suffix: <Chn> Channel number used to identify the active trace Parameters: <SkewPos> Skew position as integer percentage of the step size Options: R&S ZNB/ZNBT-K20 Manual operation:...
  • Page 766 ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference Options: R&S ZNB/ZNBT-K20 Manual operation: "Reference Trace" on page 638 8.3.1.5 CALCulate:EYE... Defines the properties and retrieves the results of the eye diagram measurement provi- ded with the Extended Time Domain Analysis option R&S ZNB/ZNBT-K20.
  • Page 767 ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference ............782 CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:MASK:SHAPe:TOP:VERTical ............783 CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:MASK:SHAPe:POLYgon:TYPE ..........783 CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:MASK:SHAPe:POLYgon:HORizontal ..........784 CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:MASK:SHAPe:POLYgon:VERTical ................784 CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:MASK:SHOW ................784 CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:MASK:STATe ..............785 CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:MASK:VIOLation:RATE ............785 CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:MASK:VIOLation:TOLerance ..............785 CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:MEASurement:DATA? ..............787 CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:MEASurement:STATe ..........787 CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:MEASurement:TTIMe:THReshold .................787 CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:NOISe:RMS ................788 CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:NOISe:STATe ..................
  • Page 768 ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference Parameters: <Weight> Weight relative to the "Cursor" tap *RST: 0 dB Default unit: dB Options: R&S ZNB/ZNBT-K20 Manual operation: "Cursor Settings" on page 627 CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:EMPHasis:CURSor:PRE <Weight> Sets the weight of the pre-cursor tap for the pre-emphasis FIR filter in the calculation chain of the related eye diagram.
  • Page 769 ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference This command will raise an execution error if the active trace in the selected channel is not an eye diagram. The equalizer can be enabled/disabled using CALCulate<Chn>:EYE: EQUalization:STATe. Suffix: <Chn> Channel number used to identify the active trace Parameters: <DC Gain>...
  • Page 770 ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference Options: R&S ZNB/ZNBT-K20 Manual operation: "CTLE Equalizer" on page 632 CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:EQUalization:STATe <Boolean> Enables/disables the CTLE at the receiver simulation of the related eye diagram. This command will raise an execution error if the active trace in the selected channel is not an eye diagram.

  • Page 771: Calculate:Eye:input:bpattern:type

    ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:INPut:DRATe <DataRate> Defines the data trate of the bit stream generator for the related eye diagram. This command will raise an execution error if the active trace in the selected channel is not an eye diagram.
  • Page 772 ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference Suffix: <Chn> Channel number used to identify the active trace Parameters: <PrbsLength> L5 | L7 | L9 | L10 | L11 | L13 | L15 Li represents an actual sequence length of 2 - 1.
  • Page 773 ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference This command will raise an execution error if the active trace in the selected channel is not an eye diagram. The low pass is enabled using CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:STIMulus:LOWPass. The rise time definition can be modified using CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:INPut:RTIMe: THReshold.
  • Page 774 ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference Parameters: <DiracDelta> *RST: 1 ns Default unit: s Options: R&S ZNB/ZNBT-K20 Manual operation: "Dirac" on page 629 CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:JITTer:DIRac:PROBability <DiracProbability> Defines the probability of the Dirac jitter in the generator simulation of the related eye diagram.
  • Page 775 ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:JITTer:PERiodic:MAGNitude <PeriodicMagnitude> Defines the magnitude of the periodic jitter in the generator simulation of the relaed eye diagram. This command will raise an execution error if the active trace in the selected channel is not an eye diagram.
  • Page 776 ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference Suffix: <Chn> Channel number used to identify the active trace Parameters: <StdDeviation> Default unit: s Options: R&S ZNB/ZNBT-K20 Manual operation: "Random" on page 628 CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:JITTer:STATe <Boolean> Activates the jitter functionality in the generator simulation of the related eye diagram. This command will raise an execution error if the active trace in the selected channel is not an eye diagram.

  • Page 777: Calculate:Eye:jitter:periodic:magnitude

    ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference Parameters: <Boolean> *RST: Options: R&S ZNB/ZNBT-K20 Manual operation: "Dirac" on page 629 CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:JITTer:TYPE:PERiodic <Boolean> Enables/disables periodic jitter insertion in the generator simulation of the related eye diagram. This command will raise an execution error if the active trace in the selected channel is not an eye diagram.

  • Page 778: Calculate:Eye:jitter:type:user

    ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:JITTer:TYPE:USER <Boolean> Enables/disables user-defined jitter insertion in the generator simulation of the related eye diagram. This command will raise an execution error if the active trace in the selected channel is not an eye diagram. Prior to enabling user-defined jitter, the jitter values must have been loaded from file using MMEMory:LOAD:EYE:JITTer.

  • Page 779: Calculate:Eye:mask:data

    ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference This command will raise an execution error if the active trace in the selected channel is not an eye diagram. Suffix: <Chn> Channel number used to identify the active trace Parameters: <VerticalOffset> Vertical offset relative to the 0 V level, i.e.

  • Page 780: Calculate:Eye:mask:fail

    ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference Example: CALCulate1:EYE:MASK:DATA? returns something like 'Eye Mask ------------------------------ Fail Condition Type Samples Violation Tolerance 1 Total Number of Samples 10342 Mask 1 (Top) Active Samples Hits 366 Fail Rate 3.539 % Test Result Fail Mask 2 (Bottom) Not Active Samples Hits ------ Fail Rate ------...
  • Page 781 ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference Return values: <TestResults> Usage: Query only Options: R&S ZNB/ZNBT-K20 Manual operation: "Mask Test On" on page 632 CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:MASK:FAIL:BEEP <Boolean> Defines whether the R&S ZNB/ZNBT should make an audible beep on mask failures in the related eye diagram.

  • Page 782: Calculate:Eye:mask:shape:top:vertical

    ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:MASK:SHAPe:BOTTom:STATe <Boolean> CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:MASK:SHAPe:POLYgon:STATe <Boolean> CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:MASK:SHAPe:TOP:STATe <Boolean> Activates/deactivates the respective area in the eye mask of the related eye diagram. This command will raise an execution error if the active trace in the selected channel is not an eye diagram.
  • Page 783 ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:MASK:SHAPe:BOTTom:STATe CALCulate<Chn>: to activate or deactivate the area in the eye mask. EYE:MASK:SHAPe:TOP:STATe The eye mask test is enabled/disabled using CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:MASK:STATe. Suffix: <Chn> Channel number used to identify the active trace Parameters: <Offset>...

  • Page 784: Calculate:Eye:mask:shape:polygon:vertical

    ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference Options: R&S ZNB/ZNBT-K20 Manual operation: "Polygon Setup" on page 634 CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:MASK:SHAPe:POLYgon:VERTical <Main>[, <Minor>] Defines the main [and minor] height of the center polygon in the mask of the related eye diagram. The geometric interpretation depends on the selected polygon type (see on page 783):...

  • Page 785: Calculate:Eye:mask:violation:rate

    ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference Parameters: <Boolean> *RST: Options: R&S ZNB/ZNBT-K20 Manual operation: "Mask Test On" on page 632 CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:MASK:VIOLation:RATE <ViolationRate> Defines the violation rate (i.e. the share of bad samples) for the mask test in the related eye diagram.
  • Page 786 ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference The return value is of type string and returns the eye measurement results in csv for- mat with decimal separator "." and field separator "," (see also MMEMory:STORe:EYE: MEASurements). Note that the full set of measurement results is only available for NRZ modulated gen- erator signals (see on page 772).

  • Page 787: Calculate:Eye:measurement:state

    ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:MEASurement:STATe <Boolean> Defines the visibility of the result info field in the related eye diagram. This command will raise an execution error if the active trace in the selected channel is not an eye diagram. Suffix: <Chn>...
  • Page 788 ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference Parameters: <NoiseRMS> Default unit: V Manual operation: "RMS" on page 630 CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:NOISe:STATe <Boolean> Enables/disables Gaussian noise in the generator simulation of the related eye dia- gram. This command will raise an execution error if the active trace in the selected channel is not an eye diagram.
  • Page 789 ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference Parameters: <Boolean> *RST: Options: R&S ZNB/ZNBT-K20 Manual operation: "Encoder" on page 625 CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:STIMulus:LOWPass <Boolean> Enables/disables a single pole low pass filter in the binary signal generator simulation of the related eye diagram measurement. The low-pass is defined using its rise time (see CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:INPut: on page 772) and rise time definition (see...
  • Page 790 ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference Parameters: <EyeView> STIMulus | EMPHasis | JITTer | NOISe | DUT | EQUalization The rightmost building block that shall be part of the calculation chain STIMulus > EMPHasis > JITTer > NOISe > DUT > EQUali- zation.
  • Page 791 ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference Example: *RST; :CALCulate1:TRANsform:TIME:STATe ON CALCulate1:FILTer:GATE:TIME:STATe ON; SHOW ON Activate time domain representation and a time gate in channel no. 1. Display the time gate CALCulate1:FILTer:GATE:TIME:STARt 2ns; STOP 3 Restrict the time gate to the time interval between 2 ns and 3 ns. CALCulate:FILTer:GATE:TIME:AOFFset ON Activate an offset of the time gate according to a new delay set- ting.
  • Page 792 ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference Parameters: <CenterTime> Center time of the time gate Range: -99.8999999 s to +99.8999999 s Increment: 0.1 ns *RST: 1.5E-009 s Default unit: s Example: *RST; :CALC:TRAN:TIME:STAT ON; :CALC:FILT:TIME: STAT ON Reset the instrument and enable the time domain representation and the time gate.
  • Page 793 ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference Suffix: <Chn> Channel number used to identify the active trace Parameters: <TimeGate> MAXimum | WIDE | NORMal | MINimum MINimum - Steepest edges (rectangle) WIDE - Normal gate (Hann) NORM - Steep edges (Hamming) Maximum - Maximum flatness (Bohman) *RST: WIDE...
  • Page 794 ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference CALCulate<Chn>:FILTer[:GATE]:TIME:STARt <StartTime> CALCulate<Chn>:FILTer[:GATE]:TIME:STOP <StopTime> These commands define the start and stop times of the time gate, respectively. Suffix: <Chn> Channel number used to identify the active trace Parameters: <StopTime> Start or stop time of the time gate. Range: -100 s to +99.999999999998 s (start time ) and -99.999999999998 s to +100 s (stop time)
  • Page 795 ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference CALCulate<Chn>:FILTer[:GATE]:TIME:WINDow <TimeGate> Selects the time gate to be applied to the time domain transform. Suffix: <Chn> Channel number used to identify the active trace Parameters: <TimeGate> RECT | HAMMing | HANNing | BOHMan | DCHebyshev RECT - steepest edges (rectangle) HANN - normal gate (Hann) HAMMing - steep edges (Hamming)
  • Page 796 ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference CALCulate:FMODel:ISD<Ph_pt>:COUPon:MEASure For a fixture modeling with the ISD tool and coupon types SYMMetric2x | OPEN1x | SHORt1x (see CALCulate:FMODel:ISD<Ph_pt>:COUPon:TYPE), this command starts the measurement of the coupon at the active ports (see CALCulate:FMODel: ISD<Ph_pt>:COUPon[:STATe]).
  • Page 797 ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference Parameters: <String> Path to the Touchstone file, either absolute or relative to the cur- rent directory (see MMEMory:CDIRectory) Manual operation: "Load File / 1x Open Preset / 1x Short Preset " on page 585 CALCulate:FMODel:ISD<Ph_pt>:COUPon:MEASure:SHORt For a fixture modeling with the ISD tool and coupon type OPSHort1x (see CALCulate:FMODel:ISD<Ph_pt>:COUPon:TYPE), this command starts the mea-...
  • Page 798 ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference This has to be defined before measuring the test coupon (using CALCulate:FMODel: ISD<Ph_pt>:COUPon:MEASure CALCulate:FMODel:ISD<Ph_pt>:COUPon: MEASure:OPEN CALCulate:FMODel:ISD<Ph_pt>:COUPon:MEASure:SHORt Suffix: <Ph_pt> Physical port number Parameters: <Boolean> 1 (ON, true) if the test coupon is connected to port <Ph_pt>, 0 (OFF, false) otherwise Example: Chapter 9.2.8, "Fixture...
  • Page 799 ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference Corresponds to the active_dut batch mode parameter of the ISD tool. Suffix: <Ph_pt> This suffix is ignored. Parameters: <DUTType> PASSive | ACTive Manual operation: "DUT Type" on page 590 CALCulate:FMODel:ISD<Ph_pt>:DUT[:STATe] <Boolean> For a fixture modeling with the ISD tool, this command allows to specify the ports to which the test fixture is connected.
  • Page 800 ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference Parameters: <Boolean> Manual operation: "Automatic Flt Tm for DUT + Lead Ins" on page 590 CALCulate:FMODel:ISD<Ph_pt>:OPERation <Operation> Defines the execution mode of the ISD tool. Suffix: <Ph_pt> This suffix is ignored. Parameters: <Operation>...
  • Page 801 ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference Manual operation: "Port Sequence" on page 590 CALCulate:FMODel:ISD<Ph_pt>:PORT:SKIP <String> Tells the ISD tool which ports (in the measured DUT + Test Fixture file) shall be skip- ped when the tool is run. Equivalent to using the ports_to_skip batch mode parameter of the ISD tool with a list of (positive) port numbers.
  • Page 802 ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference successfully loaded from file (using CALCulate:FMODel:ISD<Ph_pt>:COUPon: MEASure:FILename ● the measurement of DUT + test fixture (using CALCulate:FMODel: ISD<Ph_pt>:DUT:MEASure) finished successfully The resulting Touchstone files are written to C:\Users\Public\Documents\Rohde- Schwarz\Vna\Embedding. If result files with the same name already exist, they will be overwritten.
  • Page 803 ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference Suffix: <Ph_pt> This suffix is ignored. Parameters: <MaxFrequency> Default unit: Hz Manual operation: "Max Freq to Deembed" on page 591 CALCulate:FMODel:ISD<Ph_pt>:SCALe:FTIMe <FltLeadInScalingTime> Overrides the lead-in’s flight time in case the through-trace test coupon is a bit too short or too long.
  • Page 804 ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference CALCulate:FMODel:SFD<Ph_pt>:AUTO <Boolean> Defines whether the SFD tool shall perform automatic impedance adjustments. Suffix: <Ph_pt> This suffix is ignored. Parameters: <Boolean> Manual operation: "Adjust Impedance Mismatch" on page 593 CALCulate:FMODel:SFD<Ph_pt>:COUPon:MEASure For a fixture modeling with the SFD tool, this command starts the measurement of the coupon at the active ports (see CALCulate:FMODel:SFD<Ph_pt>:COUPon[: STATe]).
  • Page 805 ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference Manual operation: "Coupon Type" on page 585 CALCulate:FMODel:SFD<Ph_pt>:COUPon[:STATe] <Boolean> For a fixture modeling with the SFD tool, this command allows to specify the ports to which the test coupon is connected. This has to be defined before measuring the test coupon (using CALCulate:FMODel: SFD<Ph_pt>:DUT:MEASure).
  • Page 806 ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference Suffix: <Ph_pt> Physical port number Parameters: <Boolean> 1 (ON, true) if the test fixture is connected to port <Ph_pt>, 0 (OFF, false) otherwise Manual operation: "Active" on page 587 CALCulate:FMODel:SFD<Ph_pt>:RUN:RUN Runs the SFD tool. Before executing this command, make sure that ●...
  • Page 807 ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference Parameters: <SFDPortConfig> ODD | NON ODD: odd ports are on the left and even ports are on the right NON: ports 1 to N are on the left and ports N+1 to 2·N are on the right Manual operation: "Total Port Ordering"...
  • Page 808 ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference The meaning of the parameters is as follows (see also table in CALCulate<Chn>: description): MARKer<Mk>:FORMat MLINear Displays |z| in a Cartesian diagram MLOGarithmic Calculates |z| in dB (= 20 log|z|) and displays it in a Cartesian diagram MAGNitude (for compatibility with R&S ZVR ana- lyzers)
  • Page 809 ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference Manual operation: "Show as" on page 267 8.3.1.9 CALCulate:GDAPerture... The CALCulate:GDAPerture... commands configure the group delay measure- ment. CALCulate<Chn>:GDAPerture:SCOunt <Steps> Defines an aperture for the calculation of the group delay as an integer number of fre- quency sweep steps.
  • Page 810 ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference Suffix: <Chn> Channel number used to identify the active trace Parameters: <Mode> MAGPhase | REIMag Selects the averaging mode. MAGPhase Averaging of magnitude and phase (default) of the complex trace value REIMag Averaging of real and imaginary part of the complex trace value Manual operation: "Mode"...

  • Page 811: Calculate:limit:circle:fail:all

    ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference ............. 823 CALCulate<Chn>:LIMit:SEGMent<Seg>:INTerpol ..........824 CALCulate<Chn>:LIMit:SEGMent<Seg>:STIMulus:STARt ..........824 CALCulate<Chn>:LIMit:SEGMent<Seg>:STIMulus:STOP ..............824 CALCulate<Chn>:LIMit:SEGMent<Seg>:TYPE ................825 CALCulate<Chn>:LIMit:SOUNd[:STATe] ..................825 CALCulate<Chn>:LIMit:STATe ................826 CALCulate<Chn>:LIMit:STATe:AREA ..............826 CALCulate<Chn>:LIMit:TTLout<Pt>[:STATe] CALCulate:LIMit:CIRCle:FAIL:ALL? [<RecallSet>] Returns a 0 or 1 to indicate whether or not the circle limit check has failed for at least one channel in the referenced recall set.

  • Page 812: Calculate:Limit:circle[:State]

    ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference Parameters: <Boolean> Example: *RST; CALCulate:LIMit:CIRCle:DATA 0, 0, 0.5 Define a circle limit line centered around the origin of the polar diagram, assigning a radius of 0.5 U. CALCulate:LIMit:CIRCle:STATe ON; FAIL? Switch the limit check on and query the result. Manual operation: "Limit Check"...

  • Page 813: Calculate:Limit:circle:fail

    ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference Parameters: <Boolean> ON | OFF - Circle limit line on or off. *RST: Example: *RST; CALCulate:LIMit:CIRCle:DATA 0, 0, 0.5 Define a circle limit line centered around the origin of the polar diagram, assigning a radius of 0.5 U. CALCulate:FORMat POLar CALCulate:LIMit:CIRCle:DISPlay ON Activate a polar diagram and show the circle limit line in the dia-...
  • Page 814 ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference Usage: Event Manual operation: "Clear Test" on page 346 CALCulate<Chn>:LIMit:CONTrol[:DATA] <StartStim>, <StopStim>[, ...] Defines the stimulus values of the limit line and/or creates new limit line segments. See also Chapter 5.4.1.1, "Rules for Limit Line Definition", on page 135.
  • Page 815 ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference Manual operation: "Segment List" on page 349 CALCulate<Chn>:LIMit:CONTrol:SHIFt <LimShift> Shifts an existing limit line in horizontal direction. See also Chapter 5.4.1.1, "Rules for Limit Line Definition", on page 135. Suffix: <Chn> Channel number used to identify the active trace Setting parameters: <LimShift>...
  • Page 816 ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference <StartStim>, Stimulus and response values of the first and last points of the <StopStim>, limit line segment. <StartResp>, The unit of the stimulus values is adjusted to the sweep type of <StopResp> the active channel ([SENSe<Ch>:]SWEep:TYPE), the unit of the ripple limit is adjusted to the format of the active trace (CALCulate<Chn>:FORMat).
  • Page 817 ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference Parameters: <CenterX> X position (real part) of the display circle's center <CenterY> Y position (imaginary part) of the display circle's center <Radius> Radius of the display circle Manual operation: "Draw Circle / Radius, Center X, Center Y" on page 361 CALCulate<Chn>:LIMit:DCIRcle:DISPlay[:STATe] <Boolean>...
  • Page 818 ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference Parameters: <Boolean> ON | OFF - Limit line on or off. *RST: Example: *RST; :CALC:LIM:CONT 1 GHZ, 2 GHZ Define an upper limit line segment in the stimulus range between 1 GHz and 2 GHz, using default response values. CALC:LIM:DISP ON Show the limit line segment in the active diagram.
  • Page 819 ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference CALCulate<Chn>:LIMit:LOWer/UPPer sets the type and response values of even/odd limit line segments and gets the response values of even/odd limit line seg- ments - no matter what the current type of these segments actually is! Both commands will only work, if the total number of limit line segments is even.
  • Page 820 ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference Example: CALC:LIM:LOW -10, 0, 0, -10 Define two limit line segments covering the entire sweep range. Two upper limit line segments with default response values are created in addition. CALC:LIM:UPP 0, 10, 10, 0 Change the response values of the upper limit line segments .
  • Page 821 ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference CALCulate<Chn>:LIMit:LOWer:SHIFt <LimShift> CALCulate<Chn>:LIMit:UPPer:SHIFt <LimShift> These commands shift all lower and upper limit line segments assigned to the active trace in vertical direction. Both commands shift all limit lines; they have the same func- tionality.
  • Page 822 ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference Example: CALC:LIM:DATA 1,1500000000, 2000000000,2,3 Define an upper limit line segment (segment no. 1) in the stimu- lus range between 1.5 GHz and 2 GHz, assigning response val- ues of +2 dB and +3 dB. :CALC:LIM:SEGM:AMPL:STAR 5;...

  • Page 823: Calculate:Limit:control[:Data]

    ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference Example: *RST SENS:FREQ:STAR 1GHz SENS:FREQ:STOP 3GHz CALC:LIM:CONT 1GHz, 2GHz, 2GHz, 3GHz CALC:LIM:SEGM1:FORM '22-(20/25.78)*StimVal/1e9' CALC:LIM:SEGM1:FORM:STAT ON CALC:LIM:SEGM2:FORM '15-(6/25.78)*StimVal/1e9' CALC:LIM:SEGM2:TYPE LMIN CALC:LIM:DISP ON CALC:LIM:STAT ON Manual operation: "Linear/Formula" on page 352 CALCulate<Chn>:LIMit:SEGMent<Seg>:FORMula:STATe <State> Defines whether a custom formula is used for limit line segment <Seg> of the related trace.

  • Page 824: Calculate:Limit:data

    ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference Manual operation: "Segment List" on page 349 CALCulate<Chn>:LIMit:SEGMent<Seg>:STIMulus:STARt <FreqPowTime> CALCulate<Chn>:LIMit:SEGMent<Seg>:STIMulus:STOP <StimVal> These commands change the start and stop stimulus values (i.e. the smallest and the largest stimulus values) of a limit line segment. A segment must be created first to enable the commands (e.g CALCulate<Chn>:LIMit:DATA).
  • Page 825 ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference Suffix: <Chn> Channel number used to identify the active trace <Seg> Segment number Parameters: <LimLineType> LMIN | LMAX | OFF Limit line type Range: LMAX (upper limit line segment), LMIN (lower limit line segment), OFF (limit check switched off, limit line segment not deleted) *RST:...

  • Page 826: Calculate:Limit:fail

    ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference Example: *RST; CALC:LIM:CONT 1 GHZ, 2 GHZ Define an upper limit line segment in the stimulus range between 1 GHz and 2 GHz, using default response values. CALC:LIM:STAT ON; FAIL? Switch the limit check on and query the result. Manual operation: "Limit Check"...
  • Page 827 ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference 8.3.1.12 CALCulate:MARKer... The CALCulate:MARKer... commands control the marker functions. The com- mands are device-specific and beyond what is specified in the SCPI subsystem SOURce:MARKer................. 828 CALCulate:MARKer:COUPled[:STATe] ................828 CALCulate:MARKer:COUPled:TYPE ............829 CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:BWIDth:GMCenter ................

  • Page 828: Calculate:marker:coupled[:State]

    ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference ................849 CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:TYPE ...................850 CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:X ...................850 CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:Y CALCulate:MARKer:COUPled[:STATe] <Boolean> Enables marker coupling to the active trace of the active channel or disables it. to select the suitable coupling type before CALCulate:MARKer:COUPled:TYPE setting CALCulate:MARKer:COUPled:STATe to ON. Parameters: <Boolean>...
  • Page 829 ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference Example: on page 828 CALCulate:MARKer:COUPled[:STATe] Manual operation: "Coupling Type" on page 383 CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:BWIDth:GMCenter <arg0> Defines how bandfilter searches calculate the center frequency of the passband or stopband. Parameters: <arg0> ON – use geometric mean of lower and upper band edge OFF –...

  • Page 830: Calculate:Marker:mpeak:excursion:state

    ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference Parameters: <OutFormat> DEFault | MLINear | MLOGarithmic | MDB | PHASe | POLar | COMPlex | GDELay | REAL | IMAGinary | SWR | LINPhase | MLPHase | LOGPhase | MDPHase | IMPedance | ADMittance | MIMPedance DEFault means the default marker format is dynamically adjus- ted to the selected trace format (CALCulate<Chn>:FORMat).
  • Page 831 ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference Parameters: <Value> Minimum peak excursion The unit is derived from the active trace format and cannot be modified. Changing the trace format resets the excursion to a format-specific default value. Manual operation: "Excursion Settings"...

  • Page 832: Calculate:Marker:search:bfilter:result[:State]:Area

    ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer:SEARch:BFILter:RESult[:STATe] <Boolean> Shows or hides the bandfilter search results in the diagram area. Suffix: <Chn> Channel number used to identify the active trace Parameters: <Boolean> ON - show the bandfilter search results. If no bandfilter search has been initiated before (CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>: BFILter), nothing is displayed.
  • Page 833 ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference Example: Suppose that the active recall set contains an active trace no. 1. CALC:MARK1 ON; MARK2 ON Create markers 1 and 2 and assign them to the trace no. 1. CALC:MARK:AOFF Remove both markers. Usage: Event Manual operation:...

  • Page 834: Calculate:Marker:Delta[:State]

    ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference Example: CALC:MARK:FUNC:BWID:MODE BST Select a bandstop filter search. CALC:MARK:FUNC:EXEC BFIL Initiate the bandpass filter search for the current trace. Create markers M1 to M4. CALC:MARK:SEAR:BFIL:RES ON Display the marker info field in the diaram area. CALC:MARK:BWID 6 Select a 6-dB bandwidth for the bandstop.

  • Page 835: Calculate:Marker:Excursion

    ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference <Mk> Marker number Parameters: <Value> Minimum peak excursion The unit is derived from the active trace format and cannot be modified. Changing the trace format resets the excursion to a format-specific default value. Manual operation: "Excursion Settings"...

  • Page 836: Calculate:Marker:Function:center

    ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:FUNCtion:BWIDth:MODE <BandfilterType> Selects the bandfilter search mode. In contrast to manual control, bandfilter tracking is not automatically activated. Suffix: <Chn> Channel number used to identify the active trace <Mk> This numeric suffix is ignored and may be set to any value because the bandfilter search functions always use markers M1 to M4.

  • Page 837: Calculate:Marker:Function:domain:user[:Range]

    ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:FUNCtion:DOMain:USER[:RANGe] <NumSearchRange> Assigns a search range no. <NumSearchRange> to marker no <Mk> and selects the search range, e.g. in order to display range limit lines or define the start and stop val- ues.

  • Page 838: Calculate:Marker:Function:domain:user:start

    ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:FUNCtion:DOMain:USER:STARt <StarSearchRange> CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:FUNCtion:DOMain:USER:STOP <StopSearchRange> These commands define the start and stop values of the search range selected via CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:FUNCtion:DOMain:USER[:RANGe]. Suffix: <Chn> Channel number used to identify the active trace <Mk> Marker number. Parameters: <StopSearchRange>...

  • Page 839: Calculate:Marker:Function:execute

    ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference Mode Find... MAXimum Absolute maximum in the search range (see CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>: FUNCtion:DOMain:USER[:RANGe] MINimum Absolute maximum in the search range RPEak Next valid peak to the right of the current marker position LPEak Next valid peak to the left NPEak Next highest or lowest value among the valid peaks (next peak)

  • Page 840: Calculate:Marker:Function:start

    ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference Example: *RST; :CALC:MARK ON; MARK:DELTa ON Create marker 1 in the center of the current sweep range and enable the delta mode. CALC:MARK:X 300MHz Increase the stimulus value of the delta marker by 300 MHz. CALC:MARK:FUNC:SPAN Set the sweep range equal to 300 MHz.
  • Page 841 ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference Parameters: <Mode> CONTinuous | DISCrete CONTinuous - marker can be positioned on any point of the trace, and its response values are obtained by interpolation. DISCrete - marker can be set to discrete sweep points only. *RST: CONT Example:...
  • Page 842 ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference Example: Suppose that the active recall set contains an active trace no. 1. CALC:MARK:REF ON; :CALC:MARK ON Create the reference marker and marker 1 and assign them to trace no. 1. The default position of both markers is the center of the sweep range.

  • Page 843: Calculate:Marker:Name

    ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference Example: Suppose that the active recall set contains an active trace no. 1. CALC:MARK:REF:MODE DISC CALC:MARK2:REF:MODE CONT Create the reference marker in discrete mode and marker 2 in continuous mode. CALC:MARK:REF ON; :CALC:MARK2 ON Display the two markers.
  • Page 844 ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:REFerence:X <StimulusValue>[, <Seg>[, <MeasPoint>]] In NORMal or FIXed marker mode (see CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:TYPE) this command sets or gets the stimulus value of the reference marker. In ARBitrary mode this is only true if the X axis represents the stimulus. For all other trace formats (see CALCulate<Chn>:FORMat) it sets or gets the X position of the reference marker, which is decoupled from the marker stimulus in this case.

  • Page 845: Calculate:Marker:Reference:x

    ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference The marker must be created before using CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>: REFerence[:STATe] Setting this value is only possible in ARBitrary mode (see CALCulate<Chn>: MARKer<Mk>:REFerence:TYPE. For NORMal and FIXed mode markers it is read- only. Suffix: <Chn>...

  • Page 846: Calculate:Marker:Target

    ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:SEARch:FORMat <SearchFormat> Selects the format in which the target value shall be specified (see on page 847). CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:TARGet Each marker may have a different target format. The table below gives an overview on how a complex target value z = x + jy is converted.
  • Page 847 ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference Example: Suppose channel 1's selected trace is POLar and marker 1 isn't yet created :CALCULATE1:MARKER1 ON Create/enable Marker 1 :CALCulate1:MARKer1:FUNCtion:SELect TARGet Select TARGet search mode for marker 1 :CALCulate1:MARKer1:SEARch:FORMat? Query the target format of marker 1. The result is DEF and for polar diagrams the default target format is "Phase".

  • Page 848: Calculate:Marker:Threshold

    ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference <Mk> Marker number. Parameters: <TargetSearchVal> Target search value of marker no. <Mk>. The value range and reset value depend on the selected target format (see CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:SEARch: on page 846). FORMat Example: CALC:MARK ON Create marker no.
  • Page 849 ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:TYPE <Mode> Sets the marker mode for the related marker. The marker must be created before using CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>[:STATe] Suffix: <Chn> Channel number used to identify the active trace <Mk> Marker number. Parameters: <Mode>...
  • Page 850 ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference Manual operation: "Marker Mode" on page 366 CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:X <StimulusValue>[, <Seg>[, <MeasPoint>]] If the mode of the related marker is NORMal or FIXed (see CALCulate<Chn>: MARKer<Mk>:TYPE), this command sets or gets the marker's stimulus value. In ARBitrary mode this is only true if the X axis represents the stimulus.
  • Page 851 ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference The marker must be created before using CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>[:STATe] Setting this value is only possible in ARBitrary mode (see CALCulate<Chn>: MARKer<Mk>:TYPE. For NORMal and FIXed mode markers it is read-only. Suffix: <Chn> Channel number used to identify the active trace <Mk>...
  • Page 852 ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference CALCulate<Chn>:MATH[:EXPRession]:SDEFine <Expression> CALCulate<Chn>:MATH:FORMatted[:EXPRession]:SDEFine <Expression> Defines a mathematical trace for the active trace, using a string expression. ● The expression in the first command refers to raw, unformatted trace data (complex data). In order to apply it, must be set to CALCulate<Chn>:MATH:FUNCtion NORMal and...
  • Page 853 ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference Type Complete List Description Special Functions StimVal Current stimulus value (see description of operators for User Defined Math) Brackets Priority of operations in complex expressions CALCulate<Chn>:MATH:FUNCtion <Mode> CALCulate<Chn>:MATH:FORMatted:FUNCtion <Mode> Defines a simple mathematical trace based on the active trace and its active memory trace.
  • Page 854 ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference CALCulate<Chn>:MATH:MEMorize Copies the current state of the active data trace to a memory trace. If a mathematical trace is active, the data trace associated with the mathematical trace is copied. The memory trace is named Mem<n>[<Data_Trace>] where <n> counts all data and memory traces in the active recall set in chronological order, and <Data_Trace>...
  • Page 855 ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference Example: *RST; :CALC:MATH:MEM Copy the current state of the default trace 'Trc1' to a memory trace named 'Mem2[Trc1]'. The memory trace is not dis- played. CALC:MATH:SDEF 'Trc1 / Mem2[Trc1]' Define a mathematical trace, dividing the complex data trace by the stored complex memory trace.
  • Page 856 ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference .................856 CALCulate:PARameter:DELete:ALL ................856 CALCulate:PARameter:DELete:MEMory ................856 CALCulate<Ch>:PARameter:CATalog? ............... 857 CALCulate<Ch>:PARameter:CATalog:SENDed? ..............857 CALCulate<Ch>:PARameter:DEFine:SGRoup ................858 CALCulate<Ch>:PARameter:DELete ...............859 CALCulate<Ch>:PARameter:DELete:CALL ..............859 CALCulate<Ch>:PARameter:DELete:CMEMory ..............859 CALCulate<Ch>:PARameter:DELete:SGRoup ................860 CALCulate<Ch>:PARameter:MEASure ............... 861 CALCulate<Ch>:PARameter:MEASure:SENDed ................... 861 CALCulate<Ch>:PARameter:PTIP ................861 CALCulate<Ch>:PARameter:SDEFine ..............864 CALCulate<Ch>:PARameter:SDEFine:SENDed...
  • Page 857 ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference Example: CALC4:PAR:SDEF 'Ch4Tr1', 'S11' Create channel 4 and a trace named Ch4Tr1 to measure the input reflection coefficient S CALC4:PAR:CAT? Query the traces assigned to channel 4. If Ch4Tr1 is the only trace assigned to channel 4, the response is 'CH4TR1,S11'.
  • Page 858 ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference e.g. S for <log_port1> = 1, <log_port2> = 2. If only one logical port <log_port1> is specified, a single trace with the reflection coefficient S is created. <log_port1><log_port1> Trace names The generated traces are assigned the following trace names: <Ch_name>_SG_S<log_port1><log_port1>, <Ch_name>_SG_S<log_port1><log_port2>...
  • Page 859 ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference Setting parameters: <TraceName> Trace name, e.g. 'Trc4'. See "Rules for trace names" in Chap- ter 6.5.1.3, "Trace Manager Dialog", on page 299. Example: CALCulate4:PARameter:SDEFine 'Ch4Tr1', 'S11' Create channel 4 and a trace named Ch4Tr1 to measure the input reflection coefficient S CALCulate4:PAR:CAT? Query the traces assigned to channel 4.
  • Page 860 ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference Suffix: <Ch> Channel number. <Ch> may be used to reference a previously defined channel. If <Ch> does not exist, it is generated with default channel settings. Example: CALCulate<Ch>:PARameter:DEFine:SGRoup Usage: Event CALCulate<Ch>:PARameter:MEASure <TraceName>, <Result> Assigns a measurement result to an existing trace.
  • Page 861 ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference CALCulate<Ch>:PARameter:MEASure:SENDed <TraceName>, <Result> Assigns a measurement result to an existing trace. The query returns the result assigned to the specified trace (no second parameter; see example). Similar to CALCulate<Ch>:PARameter:MEASure, but in presence of balanced ports this command distinguishes between ●...
  • Page 862 ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference Tip: This command has no query form. Use CALCulate<Ch>:PARameter:MEASure <TraceName> to query the measurement result of the trace. CALCulate<Ch>: returns a list of all defined traces. PARameter:CATalog? Suffix: <Ch> Channel number. <Ch> may be used to reference a previously defined channel.
  • Page 863 ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference 'Y-S11' | ... | 'Y-SSS11' | ... | 'Y-SCC11' | ... | 'Y- S-parameters converted to matched-circuit admittances and impedances SDD11' | 'Z-S11' | ... | 'Z-SSS11' | ... | 'Z-SCC11' | ... with port modes and port numbers like for normal mode S-parameters.
  • Page 864 ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference 'PAE21' | PAE12' | ... Power added efficiency (referring to logical ports) 'IM3UO' | 'IM3LO' | 'IM3MO' | 'IM5UO' ... 'IM9MO' Intermodulation product IM<order><side><at DUT> where <order> = 3 | 5 | 7 | 9, <side>...
  • Page 865 ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference Example: CALC4:PAR:SDEF 'Ch4Tr1', 'S11' Create channel 4 and a trace named Ch4Tr1 to measure the input reflection coefficient S . The trace is the active trace in channel 4. CALC4:PAR:SDEF 'Ch4Tr2', 'S22' Create another trace named Ch4Tr2 to measure the output reflection coefficient S .
  • Page 866 ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference ..................869 CALCulate<Chn>:RIPPle:FAIL? ..............869 CALCulate<Chn>:RIPPle:RDOMain:FORMat ..............870 CALCulate<Chn>:RIPPle:SEGMent:COUNt? ............870 CALCulate<Chn>:RIPPle:SEGMent<Seg>[:STATe] ............... 871 CALCulate<Chn>:RIPPle:SEGMent<Seg>:LIMit ............871 CALCulate<Chn>:RIPPle:SEGMent<Seg>:RESult? ..........872 CALCulate<Chn>:RIPPle:SEGMent<Seg>:STIMulus:STARt ..........872 CALCulate<Chn>:RIPPle:SEGMent<Seg>:STIMulus:STOP ................873 CALCulate<Chn>:RIPPle:SOUNd[:STATe] ..................873 CALCulate<Chn>:RIPPle:STATe ................873 CALCulate<Chn>:RIPPle:STATe:AREA CALCulate:RIPPle:DISPlay:RESult:ALL[:STATe] <Enable> Configures the display of ripple check info fields for the active recall set. Parameters: <Enable>...
  • Page 867 ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference CALCulate<Chn>:RIPPle:CONTrol:DOMain <SweepType> Deletes the existing ripple limit ranges and (re-)defines the physical units of the stimu- lus values of the ripple limit lines. The unit of the ripple limit is defined via CALCulate<Chn>:RIPPle:RDOMain:FORMat.
  • Page 868 ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference <Type> – Boolean identifier for the ripple limit range type. 1 for ripple limit range on (with limit check). 0 for ripple limit range off: The range is defined, but no limit check result displayed. The result is still available via CALCulate<Chn>:RIPPle: SEGMent<Seg>:RESult?.
  • Page 869 ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference CALCulate<Chn>:RIPPle:DISPlay[:STATe] <Boolean> Displays or hides all ripple limit lines (including all ranges) associated to the active trace. Suffix: <Chn> Channel number used to identify the active trace Parameters: <Boolean> ON | OFF - ripple limit line on or off. *RST: Example: *RST;...
  • Page 870 ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference Setting parameters: <UnitRef> COMPlex | MAGNitude | PHASe | REAL | IMAGinary | SWR | GDELay | L | C Keyword for the physical unit of the response values; dimension- less numerss, relative power, phase, time, inductance, capaci- tance units.
  • Page 871 ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference Parameters: <Boolean> ON | OFF - Limit check on or off. A result is available even if the limit check is disabled; see example for CALCulate<Chn>: RIPPle:SEGMent<Seg>:RESult?. *RST: n/a (no ripple limit line defined after a reset) Example: CALCulate<Chn>:RIPPle:SEGMent<Seg>:STIMulus: STARt...
  • Page 872 ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference Note: In remote control, the ripple limit check result is calculated once at the end of each sweep. If the ripple limits are changed, a new sweep is required to obtain upda- ted ripple limit check results.
  • Page 873 ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference Example: *RST; CALC:RIPP:DATA 1,1500000000, 2000000000,3 Define and enable a ripple limit range in the stimulus range between 1.5 GHz and 2 GHz, assigning a ripple limit of +3 dB. CALC:RIPP:SEGM:STIM:STAR 1GHZ; STOP 2.5 GHZ; : CALC:RIPP:SEGM:LIM 5 Change the range to a stimulus range between 1 GHz and 2.5 GHz and a limit of 5 dB.
  • Page 874 ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference Suffix: <Chn> Channel number used to identify the active trace Parameters: <HorizontalPos> LEFT | MID | RIGHt Horizontal position <VerticalPos> TOP | MID | BOTTom Vertical position Example: CALCulate<Chn>:RIPPle:FAIL? Manual operation: "Ripple Check" on page 353 8.3.1.17 CALCulate:SMOothing...
  • Page 875 ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference Example: *RST; :CALC:SMO ON Activate smoothing for the default trace. CALC:SMO:APER 0.5 Reduce the smoothing aperture to 0.5 %. Manual operation: "Aperture" on page 334 8.3.1.18 CALCulate:STATistics... The CALCulate:STATistics... commands evaluate and display statistical and phase information of the trace.

  • Page 876: Calculate:Statistics[:State]

    ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference Parameters: <Boolean> ON | OFF - Statistical info field on or off. *RST: Example: *RST; :CALC:STAT:MMPT ON Reset the instrument, hiding all statistical results. Display the "Min/Max/Peak-Peak" results. CALC:STAT:MSTD ON Display the "Mean/Std Dev" results in addition. CALC:STAT:RMS ON Display the "RMS"...

  • Page 877: Calculate:Statistics:domain:user

    ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference Parameters: <EvalRange> Number of the evaluation range. Range: 1 to 10. In addition, 0 denotes the (non-configura- ble) "Full Span" evaluation range. *RST: Example: *RST; :CALC:STAT:DOM:USER? Query the default evaluation range. The response is zero, i.e. the evaluation range is equal to the complete sweep range CALC:STAT:DOM:USER 1 CALC:STAT:DOM:USER:STARt 1GHZ;...

  • Page 878: Calculate:Statistics:domain:user:show

    ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference CALCulate<Chn>:STATistics:EPDelay[:STATe] <Boolean> CALCulate<Chn>:STATistics:MMPTpeak[:STATe] <Boolean> CALCulate<Chn>:STATistics:MSTDdev[:STATe] <Boolean> These commands display or hide the "Phase/El Length" results, the "Min/Max/Peak- Peak" results, and the "Mean/Std Dev" results in the diagram area of trace no. <Chn>. Suffix: <Chn>...

  • Page 879: Calculate:Statistics:nlinear:comp:rdomain:user

    ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference Example: CALCulate<Chn>:STATistics:NLINear:COMP: RESult? Manual operation: "Compr. Point / Compr. Val." on page 329 CALCulate<Chn>:STATistics:NLINear:COMP:PHASe <PhaseValue> Defines the compression value x for the compression point measurement for phase formatted traces. to retrieve the CALCulate<Chn>:STATistics:NLINear:COMP:RESult? compression results.

  • Page 880: Calculate:Statistics:nlinear:comp:rlevel

    ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference Parameters: <Boolean> ON | OFF – reference range limit lines on or off. *RST: Manual operation: "Ref. Range" on page 331 CALCulate<Chn>:STATistics:NLINear:COMP:RDOMain:USER:STARt <Start> Defines the start value of the range selected via CALCulate<Chn>:STATistics: NLINear:COMP:RDOMain:USER.

  • Page 881: Calculate:Statistics:nlinear:comp:rphase

    ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference RANGe – uses the average value in a configurable reference range as the reference value (see CALCulate<Chn>: STATistics:NLINear:COMP:RDOMain:USER) *RST: FPOint Manual operation: "Reference Value" on page 330 CALCulate<Chn>:STATistics:NLINear:COMP:RESult? Returns the compression point of an S-parameter or ratio measured in a power sweep. For dB formatted traces, the compression value x is set via CALCulate<Chn>: STATistics:NLINear:COMP:LEVel, for phase formatted traces it is set via...
  • Page 882 ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference Parameters: <Level> Reference level *RST: 1 dB Default unit: dB Manual operation: "Defined Value" on page 331 CALCulate<Chn>:STATistics:NLINear:COMP:RMARker <Marker> Allows you to select the marker whose value shall be used as the reference ("small sig- nal value") for the compression point calculation.

  • Page 883: Calculate:Statistics:nlinear:comp[:State]

    ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference For dB formatted traces, the reference level can be set using CALCulate<Chn>: STATistics:NLINear:COMP:RLEVel. Suffix: <Chn> Channel number used to identify the active trace Parameters: <Phase> Reference phase *RST: 1° Default unit: deg Manual operation: "Defined Value"...

  • Page 884: Calculate:Statistics:rms[:State]

    ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference SLOPe - return the slope (difference) between two marker val- ues. FLATness - return the flatness of the trace between two marker positions. ALL - return all statistical values, observing the order used above.
  • Page 885 ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference Manual operation: "TD-VSWR" on page 314 8.3.1.20 CALCulate:TRANsform... The CALCulate:TRANsform... commands convert measured data from one repre- sentation to another and control the transformation into the time domain (see Chap- ter 5.7.2, "Time Domain Analysis", on page 203).
  • Page 886 ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference Suffix: <Chn> Channel number used to identify the active trace Parameters: <Result> S | Y | Z S-parameters, Y-parameters, Z-parameters Example: *RST; CALC:PAR:MEAS 'Trc1'", '"Y-S22' Select the converted admittance Y <-- S22 as measurement parameter of the default trace.
  • Page 887 ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference Example: *RST; :CALC:TRAN:TIME:STAT ON Reset the instrument, activating a frequency sweep, and enable the time domain transformation for the default trace. CALC:TRAN:TIME LPAS; TIME:STIM STEP Select a low pass step transformation. CALC:TRAN:TIME:LPAS KFST Calculate a harmonic grid, keeping the stop frequency and the number of points.

  • Page 888: Calculate:Transform:complex

    ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference Parameters: <SidebandSupp> Sideband suppression Range: 10 dB to 120 dB Increment: 10 dB *RST: 32 dB Default unit: dB Example: *RST; :CALC:TRAN:TIME:WIND DCH Reset the instrument and select a Dolph-Chebyshev window for filtering the data in the frequency domain.
  • Page 889 ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference Example: *RST; :CALC:TRAN:TIME:STAT ON Reset the instrument, activating a frequency sweep with S measured quantity, and enable the time domain transformation for the default trace. CALC:TRAN:TIME LPAS; TIME:STIM STEP Select a low pass step transformation. CALC:TRAN:TIME:LPAS KFST Calculate a harmonic grid, maintaining the stop frequency and the number of points.

  • Page 890: Calculate:Transform:time:center

    ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference Usage: Event Manual operation: "DC Value" on page 315 CALCulate<Chn>:TRANsform:TIME:LPFRequency Calculates the harmonic grid for low pass time domain transforms, keeping the stop frequency and the number of points. Tip: Use if you wish to use one of the CALCulate<Chn>:TRANsform:TIME:LPASs other algorithms for calculating the grid.
  • Page 891 ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference Manual operation: "Time Start / Time Stop / Time Center / Time Span" on page 388 Note: If the x-axis is scaled in distance units (CALCulate<Chn>:TRANsform:TIME: DISTance), then the span is entered in m; the range and default value XAXis changes accordingly.

  • Page 892: Calculate:Transform:time:start

    ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference CALCulate<Chn>:TRANsform:TIME:STIMulus <Type> Selects the type of stimulus to be simulated in the low pass transformation process. Suffix: <Chn> Channel number used to identify the active trace Parameters: <Type> IMPulse | STEP IMPulse - impulse response, in bandpass or lowpass mode. STEP - step response, only in lowpass mode (a bandpass mode setting CALCulate<Chn>:TRANsform:TIME[:TYPE]...
  • Page 893 ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference HANN - normal profile (Hann) HAMMing - low first sidelobe (Hamming) BOHMan - steep falloff (Bohman) DCHebyshev - arbitrary sidelobes (Dolph-Chebychev) *RST: HANN Example: CALCulate<Chn>:TRANsform:TIME:DCHebyshev Manual operation: "Impulse Response" on page 313 CALCulate<Chn>:TRANsform:TIME:XAXis <Unit>...
  • Page 894 ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference CALCulate<Chn>:TRANsform:DTFault:DEFine <CblName>, <CblPermittivity>, <CblAtt1>, <CblFreq1>{, <CblAtt2>, <CblFreq2>}... Defines a new user-defined cable type for Distance to Fault (DtF) measurements. The cable's frequency-dependent attenuation is defined via attenuation/frequency pairs <CblAtt1>, <CblFreq1>, <CblAtt2>, <CblFreq2>, ..At least one pair has to be specified.

  • Page 895: Calculate:Transform:time:xaxis

    ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference Suffix: <Chn> Channel number This suffix is ignored: cable types are defined for (and deleted from) all channels. Setting parameters: <DtfDeleteCable> Name of a user-defined cable type. Example: CALCulate:TRANsform:DTFault:DELete 'My cable type' Deletes the user-defined cable type "My cable type".
  • Page 896 ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference Manual operation: "Start Distance / Stop Distance" on page 320 CALCulate<Chn>:TRANsform:DTFault:PEAK:COUNt? If the active trace of channel <Chn> is a Distance to Fault (DtF) trace and DtF limit checking is enabled, this query returns the number of DtF limit violations of this trace. to enable DtF limit CALCulate<Chn>:TRANsform:DTFault:PEAK:STATe checking and...
  • Page 897 ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference Parameters: <DtfPeakState> OFF|ON (0|1) Example: *RST; :CALCulate1:TRANsform:DTFault:STATe ON makes the active trace of channel 1 a DtF trace. CALCulate1:TRANsform:DTFault:PEAK:STATe ON enables DtF limit checking. Options: R&S ZNB/ZNBT-K3 Manual operation: "Fault Limit Check" on page 322 CALCulate<Chn>:TRANsform:DTFault:PEAK:THReshold <PeakThreshold>...
  • Page 898 ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference Example: *RST; :CALCulate1:TRANsform:DTFault:STATe ON makes the active trace of channel 1 a DtF trace. SENSe1:SWEep:POINts? returns the default number of sweep points (201). :CALCulate1:TRANsform:DTFault:STARt 0; STOP 100 widens the DtF distance window to 100m. CALCulate1:TRANsform:DTFault:POINts starts the "Auto Number of Points calculation".
  • Page 899 ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference Example: :CALCulate1:TRANsform:DTFault:STATE ON turns the DtF representation of the active trace of channel 1 ON. Options: R&S ZNB/ZNBT-K3 Manual operation: "Distance to Fault" on page 319 8.3.1.22 CALCulate:TRANsform:VNETworks... The CALCulate:TRANsform:VNETworks... commands define the circuit models for single ended and balanced port (de-)embedding and activate the (de-)embedding function.
  • Page 900 ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference Parameter Circuit model Pictogram CSSL Serial Cs, shunt L LSSC Serial Ls, shunt C CSSC Serial Cs, shunt C LSSL Serial Ls, shunt L SLCS Shunt L, serial Cs SCLS Shunt C, serial Ls SCCS Shunt C, serial Cs SLLS...
  • Page 901 ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference Parameter Circuit model Pictogram STSG Serial Touchstone (.s2p) data, shunt C SGST Shunt C, serial Touchstone (.s2p) data GSSL Serial Cs, shunt L LSSG Serial Ls, shunt C GSSG Serial Cs, shunt C SLGS Shunt L, serial Cs SGLS...
  • Page 902 ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference Table 8-7: Circuit models for single ended port embedding/deembedding Parameter Circuit model Pictogram FIMPort File import, generic 2-port (no circuit model) Serial C, shunt L Serial L, shunt C Serial C, shunt C Serial L, shunt L Shunt L, serial C Shunt C, serial L...
  • Page 903 ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference Parameter Circuit model Pictogram Shunt L, serial L SHLC Shunt L, shunt C Serial C, shunt L Serial L, shunt C Serial C, shunt C Shunt C, serial L Shunt L, serial C Shunt C, serial C User Manual 1173.9163.02 ─...
  • Page 904 ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference Table 8-8: Circuit models for ground loop port embedding/deembedding Parameter Circuit model Pictogram FIMPort File import, no circuit model Shunt L Shunt C Shunt C Table 8-9: Circuit models for differential match embedding Parameter Circuit model Pictogram...
  • Page 905 ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:BALanced:DEEMbedding<LogPt>: ...................909 PARameters:L<Cmp> CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:BALanced:DEEMbedding<LogPt>: ..................910 PARameters:R<Cmp> ..911 CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:BALanced:DEEMbedding<LogPt>:TNDefinition ....911 CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:BALanced:EMBedding<LogPt>[:STATe] CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:BALanced:EMBedding<LogPt>:PARameters: ......................912 C<Cmp> CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:BALanced:EMBedding<LogPt>:PARameters: ......................913 DATA<Port> CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:BALanced:EMBedding<LogPt>:PARameters: ......................914 G<Cmp> CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:BALanced:EMBedding<LogPt>:PARameters: ......................914 L<Cmp> CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:BALanced:EMBedding<LogPt>:PARameters: ......................915 R<Cmp> ..916 CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:BALanced:EMBedding<LogPt>:TNDefinition .... 916 CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:DIFFerential:EMBedding<LogPt>[:STATe] CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:DIFFerential:EMBedding<LogPt>: ..................
  • Page 906 ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:PPAir:DEEMbedding<ListId>:PARameters: ......................931 L<1|2|3> CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:PPAir:DEEMbedding<ListId>:PARameters: ......................931 R<1|2|3> .... 932 CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:PPAir:DEEMbedding<ListId>:TNDefinition ....... 932 CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:PPAir:EMBedding<ListId>[:STATe] ....... 933 CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:PPAir:EMBedding<ListId>:DEFine ....... 934 CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:PPAir:EMBedding<ListId>:DELete CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:PPAir:EMBedding<ListId>:PARameters: ......................934 C<1|2|3> CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:PPAir:EMBedding<ListId>:PARameters: ......................935 L<1|2|3> CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:PPAir:EMBedding<ListId>:PARameters: ......................935 R<1|2|3> CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:PPAir:EMBedding<ListId>:PARameters: ......................936 G<1|2|3> ....
  • Page 907 ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference Suffix: <Ch> Channel number <LogPt> Logical port number (balanced port) Parameters: <Boolean> ON - deembedding active OFF - deembedding inactive *RST: Example: *RST; SOUR:LPOR1 1,2; LPOR2 3,4 Define a balanced port configuration. CALC:TRAN:VNET:BAL:DEEM:TND CSSL Select the Serial Cs, shunt L circuit model for deembedding.
  • Page 908 ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference Example: *RST; :SOUR:LPOR1 1,2; :CALC:TRAN:VNET:BAL: DEEM:PAR:C2? CSSL Create a balanced port and query the default capacitance C2 for the Serial Cs, shunt L circuit model. The response is 1E-012 (1 pF). CALC:TRAN:VNET:BAL:DEEM:PAR:C2 CSSL, 2.2E-12 Increase the capacitance to 2.2 pF.

  • Page 909: Calculate:Transform:vnetworks:balanced:deembedding: Parameters:l

    ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference SINCreasing Swapped increasing port sequence (high port numbers towards VNA, low port numbers towards DUT) <arg1> <block_data> Content of a Touchstone file (*.s2p or *.s4p) in IEEE488.2 Block Data Format. Usage: Setting only CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:BALanced:DEEMbedding<LogPt>: PARameters:G<Cmp>...
  • Page 910 ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference Suffix: <Ch> Channel number <LogPt> Logical port number (balanced port) <Cmp> Number of inductance in circuit model. The total number of inductances depends on the selected circuit model. Parameters: <Inductance> Inductance L<Cmp> for the specified circuit model. Range: -1H to 1 H.

  • Page 911: Calculate:Transform:vnetworks:balanced:embedding[:State]

    ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference Parameters: <Resistance> Resistance R<Cmp> for the specified circuit model. Range: -10 MΩ to 10 MΩ. Increment: 1 mΩ (1E-3 Ω) *RST: 0 Ω for all resistances connected in series with an inductance. 10 MΩ for all resistances connected in parallel with a capacitance Default unit: Ω...
  • Page 912 ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference Suffix: <Ch> Channel number <LogPt> Logical port number (balanced port) Parameters: <Boolean> ON | OFF - embedding active or inactive *RST: Example: *RST; SOUR:LPOR1 1,2; LPOR2 3,4 Define a balanced port configuration. CALC:TRAN:VNET:BAL:EMB:TND CSSL Select the Serial Cs, shunt L circuit model for embedding.
  • Page 913 ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference Example: *RST; :SOUR:LPOR1 1,2; :CALC:TRAN:VNET:BAL:EMB: PAR:C2? CSSL Create a balanced port and query the default capacitance C2 for the Serial Cs, shunt L circuit model. The response is 1E-012 (1 pF). CALC:TRAN:VNET:BAL:EMB:PAR:C2 CSSL, 2.2E-12 Increase the capacitance to 2.2 pF.
  • Page 914 ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference SINCreasing Swapped increasing port sequence (high port numbers towards VNA, low port numbers towards DUT) <arg1> <block_data> Content of a Touchstone file (*.s2p or *.s4p) in IEEE488.2 Block Data Format. Usage: Setting only CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:BALanced:EMBedding<LogPt>: PARameters:G<Cmp>...
  • Page 915 ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference Suffix: <Ch> Channel number <LogPt> Logical port number (balanced port) <Cmp> Number of inductance in circuit model. The total number of inductances depends on the selected circuit model. Parameters: <Inductance> Inductance L<Cmp> for the specified circuit model. Range: -1H to 1 H.

  • Page 916: Calculate:Transform:vnetworks:differential:embedding

    ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference Parameters: <Resistance> Resistance R<Cmp> for the specified circuit model. Range: -10 MΩ to 10 MΩ. Increment: 1 mΩ (1E-3 Ω) *RST: 0 Ω for all resistances connected in series with an inductance. 10 MΩ for all resistances connected in parallel with a capacitance Default unit: Ω...

  • Page 917: Parameters:c

    ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference Suffix: <Ch> Channel number <LogPt> Logical port number (balanced port) Parameters: <Boolean> ON | OFF - embedding active or inactive *RST: Manual operation: "Active" on page 570 CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:DIFFerential:EMBedding<LogPt>: PARameters:C<Cmp> <CircuitModel>[, <Capacitance>] Specifies the capacitance value C in the "Shunt L, Shunt C" lumped element model for differential match embedding.

  • Page 918: Calculate:Transform:vnetworks:differential:embedding: Parameters:g

    ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference FPORts (or omitted) Standard port sequence (network port 1 towards VNA, network port 2 towards DUT) IPORts | SGATes Inverted port sequence (network port 2 towards VNA, network port 1 towards DUT) <SParamTrcs>...

  • Page 919: Parameters:r

    ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference Parameters: <CircuitModel> SHLC Currently only the "Shunt L, Shunt C" lumped element model is supported <Inductance> Range: -1 H to 1 H Increment: 1 pH (1E-12 H) *RST: 1 nH (1E-9 H) Default unit: H Manual operation: "Network"...

  • Page 920: Calculate:Transform:vnetworks:gloop:deembedding[:State]

    ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:GLOop:DEEMbedding<group>[:STATe] <Boolean> Enables or disables the deembedding function for ground loops. It is allowed to change the circuit model and its parameters while deembedding is enabled. Suffix: <Ch> Channel number. <group> Port group (DUT) number. If multiple port groups are configured (see SOURce<Ch>: GROup<Grp>:PPORts) and...
  • Page 921 ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference Parameters for setting and query: <CircuitModel> SC | SG Possible circuit models (character data); see Table 8-8. Example: *RST; :CALC:TRAN:VNET:GLO:DEEM:PAR:C? SC Query the default capacitance for ground loop deembedding. The response is 1E-012 (1 pF). CALC:TRAN:VNET:GLO:DEEM:PAR:C SC, 2.2E-12 Increase the capacitance to 2.2 pF.
  • Page 922 ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference <group> Port group (DUT) number. If multiple port groups are configured (see SOURce<Ch>: GROup<Grp>:PPORts) and CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform: is ON, then each port group can VNETworks:GLOop:GROup have its own de-/embedding models. Parameters: <Inductance> Inductance L for ground loop deembedding. Range: -1 H to 1 H.

  • Page 923: Calculate:Transform:vnetworks:gloop:embedding[:State]

    ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference Parameters for setting and query: <CircuitModel> SL | SC Possible circuit models (character data); see Table 8-8. Example: *RST; :CALC:TRAN:VNET:GLO:DEEM:PAR:R? SC; R? SL Query the default resistances for ground loop deembedding. The response is 10000000;...

  • Page 924: Calculate:Transform:vnetworks:gloop:embedding:Parameters:c

    ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference Parameters: <Boolean> ON - Embedding active OFF - Embedding inactive *RST: Example: CALC:TRAN:VNET:GLO:EMB:TND SL Select the Shunt L circuit model for embedding. CALC:TRAN:VNET:GLO:EMB:PAR:R SL, 2.2E+3; :CALC: TRAN:VNET:GLO:EMB ON Increase the resistance for the Shunt L circuit model to 2.2 kΩ and enable embedding.
  • Page 925 ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:GLOop:EMBedding<group>: PARameters:G <CircuitModel>, <Conductance> CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:GLOop:EMBedding<group>: PARameters:G? <CircuitModel> Specifies the conductance value G in the different circuit models for ground loop embedding. Suffix: <Ch> Channel number. <group> Port group (DUT) number. If multiple port groups are configured (see SOURce<Ch>: GROup<Grp>:PPORts) and CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:...
  • Page 926 ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference Parameters: <Inductance> Inductance L for ground loop embedding. Range: -1H to 1 H. Increment: 1 pH (1E-12 H) *RST: 1 nH (1E-9 H) Default unit: H Parameters for setting and query: <CircuitModel> Possible circuit models (character data);...

  • Page 927: Calculate:Transform:vnetworks:gloop:group

    ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference Example: *RST; :CALC:TRAN:VNET:GLO:EMB:PAR:R? SC; R? SL Query the default resistances for ground loop embedding. The response is 10000000; 0. CALC:TRAN:VNET:GLO:EMB:PAR:R SC, 2.2E+3 Increase the resistance for the Shunt C model to 2.2 kΩ. Manual operation: "Network"...

  • Page 928: Calculate:Transform:vnetworks:ppair:deembedding:delete

    ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:FSIMulator[:STATe] <Enable> De/activates the "Fixture Simulator" switch that allows to disable and (re-)enable the configured deembedding, embedding, balanced ports, and port impedance settings for the selected channel. Suffix: <Ch> Channel number Parameters: <Enable>...

  • Page 929: Calculate:Transform:vnetworks:ppair:deembedding:Define

    ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference Manual operation: "Active" on page 566 CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:PPAir:DEEMbedding<ListId>:DEFine <PP_First>,<PP_Second>,<PP_First>,... Creates one or more port pairs for port set deembedding. The command can be used repeatedly to extend or (partially) overwrite the list of port sets for deembedding. CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:PSET:DEEMbedding<ListId>: on page 937 for general port set definition.
  • Page 930 ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference Parameters: <Capacitance> Capacitance Ci Range: -1 mF to 1 mF Increment: 1 fF (1E-15 F) *RST: 1 pF (1E-12 F) Default unit: F Parameters for setting and query: <CircuitModel> STSC | SCST | CSSL | LSSC | CSSC | SLCS | SCLS | SCCS | STSG | SGST | GSSL | LSSG | GSSG | SLGS | SGLS | SGGS Circuit model whose capacitance C<i>...
  • Page 931 ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:PPAir:DEEMbedding<ListId>: PARameters:L<1|2|3> <CircuitModel>, <Inductance> CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:PPAir:DEEMbedding<ListId>: PARameters:L<1|2|3>? <CircuitModel> Specifies the inductance value L<i> in the different lumped circuit models for port pair deembedding. In the query form, the <Inductance> parameter must be omitted. The command returns the inductance value for the specified circuit model.

  • Page 932: Calculate:Transform:vnetworks:ppair:embedding[:State]

    ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference <1|2|3> 1|2|3 Index i of the resistance R<i> in the related lumped circuit model. If unspecified the numeric suffix is set to 1. Parameters: <CircuitModel> STSL | STSC | SLST | SCST | CSSL | LSSC | CSSC | LSSL | SLCS | SCLS | SCCS | SLLS | GSSL | LSSG | SLGS | SGLS Circuit model whose resistance R<i>...

  • Page 933: Calculate:Transform:vnetworks:ppair:embedding:Define

    ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference Suffix: <Ch> Channel number <ListId> Index of the affected port set (see CALCulate<Ch>: TRANsform:VNETworks:PPAir:EMBedding<ListId>: DEFine) Parameters: <Boolean> OFF (0): Embedding inactive ON (1): Embedding active *RST: OFF (0) Example: *RST; CALC:TRAN:VNET:PPA:EMB:DEF 1,2,3,4 Define a port pair configuration with port pairs (1,2) and (3,4).

  • Page 934: Calculate:Transform:vnetworks:ppair:embedding:Delete

    ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference Manual operation: "Add / Delete" on page 566 CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:PPAir:EMBedding<ListId>:DELete Deletes all port sets (including port pairs) previously defined for embedding. Suffix: <Ch> Channel number <ListId> This suffix is ignored Example: CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:PPAir: EMBedding<ListId>[:STATe] Usage: Event Manual operation:...

  • Page 935: Calculate:Transform:vnetworks:ppair:embedding:Parameters: R<1|2|3

    ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference Example: CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:PPAir: EMBedding<ListId>[:STATe] Manual operation: "Network" on page 594 CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:PPAir:EMBedding<ListId>:PARameters: L<1|2|3> <arg0>, <Inductance> CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:PPAir:EMBedding<ListId>:PARameters: L<1|2|3>? <arg0> Specifies the inductance value L<i> in the different lumped circuit models for port pair embedding. In the query form, the <Inductance> parameter must be omitted. The command returns the inductance value for the specified circuit model.

  • Page 936: Calculate:Transform:vnetworks:ppair:embedding:Parameters: G<1|2|3

    ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference In the query form, the <Resistance> parameter must be omitted. The command returns the resistance value for the specified circuit model. Suffix: <Ch> Channel number <ListId> Index of the affected port pair (see CALCulate<Ch>: TRANsform:VNETworks:PPAir:DEEMbedding<ListId>: DEFine)

  • Page 937: Calculate:Transform:vnetworks:ppair:embedding:Tndefinition

    ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference Parameters: <Conductance> Conductance G<i> for the specified circuit model. Range: -1kS to 1 kS. Increment: 1 pS (1E-12 S) *RST: Default unit: Siemens (SI unit symbol: S) Parameters for setting and query: <arg0>...

  • Page 938: Calculate:Transform:vnetworks:sended:deembedding[:State]

    ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:PPAir:DEEMbedding:DELete CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:PPAir:EMBedding<ListId>:DELete on page 934 to delete all port sets (including port pairs). Suffix: <Ch> Channel number <ListId> Index of the defined port set within the channel's overall list of port sets for deembedding/embedding. Parameters: <Port1>, <Port2>, ...
  • Page 939 ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference Suffix: <Ch> Channel number <PhyPt> Physical port number Setting parameters: <Interchange> FPORts | IPORts | SGATes FPORts (or omitted) Standard port sequence (network port 1 towards VNA, network port 2 towards DUT) IPORts | SGATes Inverted port sequence (network port 2 towards VNA, network port 1 towards DUT)
  • Page 940 ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference Example: *RST; :CALC:TRAN:VNET:SEND:DEEM:PAR:C2? CSC Query the default capacitance C2 for the Serial C, shunt C cir- cuit model. The response is 1E-012 (1 pF). CALC:TRAN:VNET:SEND:DEEM:PAR:C2 CSC, 2.2E-12 Increase the capacitance to 2.2 pF. Manual operation: "Network"...
  • Page 941 ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:SENDed:DEEMbedding<PhyPt>: PARameters:L<Cmp> <CircuitModel>, <Inductance> CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:SENDed:DEEMbedding<PhyPt>: PARameters:L<Cmp>? <CircuitModel> Specifies the inductance value L<Cmp> in the different circuit models for single ended port deembedding. In the query form, the <Inductance> parameter must be omitted. The command returns the inductance value for the specified circuit model.

  • Page 942: Calculate:Transform:vnetworks:sended:embedding[:State]

    ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference <Cmp> Number of resistance in circuit model. The total number of resis- tances depends on the selected circuit model. Parameters: <Resistance> Resistance R<Cmp> for the specified circuit model. Range: -10 MΩ to 10 MΩ. Increment: 1 mΩ...

  • Page 943: Calculate:Transform:vnetworks:sended:embedding:Parameters: C

    ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference Suffix: <Ch> Channel number <PhyPt> Physical port number Parameters: <Boolean> ON - embedding active OFF - embedding inactive *RST: Example: CALC:TRAN:VNET:SEND:EMB:TND CSL Select the Serial C, shunt L circuit model for embedding. CALC:TRAN:VNET:SEND:EMB:PAR:R2 CSL, 2.2E+3;...
  • Page 944 ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:SENDed:EMBedding<PhyPt>: PARameters:C<Cmp> <CircuitModel>, <Capacitance> CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:SENDed:EMBedding<PhyPt>: PARameters:C<Cmp>? <CircuitModel> Specifies the capacitance value C<Cmp> in the different circuit models for single ended port embedding. In the query form, the <Capacitance> parameter must be omitted. The command returns the capacitance value for the specified circuit model.
  • Page 945 ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference <Cmp> Number of the conductance component in the circuit model. The total number of conductances depends on the selected circuit model. Parameters: <Conductance> Conductance G<Cmp> for the specified circuit model. Range: -1kS to 1 kS. Increment: 1 pS (1E-12 S) *RST: Default unit: Siemens (SI unit symbol: S)
  • Page 946 ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference Parameters for setting and query: <CircuitModel> CSL | LSC | LSL | SLC | SCL | SLL | SHLC | GSL | LSG | SLG | Possible circuit models (character data); see Table 8-7.
  • Page 947 ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:SENDed:EMBedding<PhyPt>: TNDefinition <CircuitModel> Selects the circuit model for single ended port embedding. Suffix: <Ch> Channel number <PhyPt> Physical port number Parameters: <CircuitModel> FIMPort | CSL | LSC | CSC | LSL | SLC | SCL | SCC | SLL | SHLC | GSL | LSG | GSG | SLG | SGL | SGG Possible circuit models (character data);...

  • Page 948: Configure Commands

    ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference CALCulate<Chn>:TTIMe:STATe <Boolean> Enables/disables the Rise Time Measurement. Note: The rise time measurement can only be enabled if the active trace is real (CALCulate<Chn>:FORMat REAL), Time Domain is enabled (CALCulate<Chn>: ON), and the Low Pass Step time domain transform is used TRANsform:TIME:STATe LPASs and CALCulate<Chn>:TRANsform:TIME[:TYPE]...
  • Page 949 ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference ..................949 CONFigure:CHANnel:CATalog? ..............949 CONFigure:CHANnel:MEASure:ALL[:STATe] ..................950 CONFigure:CHANnel<Ch>[:STATe] ..............950 CONFigure:CHANnel<Ch>:MEASure[:STATe] ................... 951 CONFigure:CHANnel<Ch>:NAME ................951 CONFigure:CHANnel<Ch>:NAME:ID? ..............951 CONFigure:CHANnel<Ch>:TRACe:REName ..............952 CONFigure:CHANnel<Ch>:TRACe:CATalog? ..................952 CONFigure:TRACe:CATalog? ..................953 CONFigure:TRACe:WINDow? ................953 CONFigure:TRACe:WINDow:TRACe? ..............954 CONFigure:TRACe<Trc>:CHANnel:NAME? ..............954 CONFigure:TRACe<Trc>:CHANnel:NAME:ID? ..................955 CONFigure:TRACe<Trc>:NAME...
  • Page 950 ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference CONFigure:CHANnel<Ch>[:STATe] <Boolean> Creates or deletes channel no. <Ch> and selects it as the active channel. defines the channel name. CONFigure:CHANnel<Ch>:NAME A channel created using CONFigure:CHANnel<Ch>[:STATe] ON can be configured but has no trace assigned so that no measurement can be initiated. Use <TraceName>, <Result>...
  • Page 951 ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference CONFigure:CHANnel<Ch>:NAME <ChannelName> Assigns a name to channel number <Ch>. The channel must be created before (CONFigure:CHANnel<Ch>[:STATe] ON). Moreover it is not possible to assign the same name to two different channels. returns a list CONFigure:CHANnel:CATalog? of all defined channels with their names.
  • Page 952 ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference Example: *RST; :CONF:CHAN:TRAC:REN 'Testtrace_1' Reset the analyzer to create a default trace in channel 1 and set this trace as the active trace. Rename the trace 'Testtrace_1'. CALC:PAR:SDEF 'Testtrace_2', 'S11' Create a new trace which will become the active trace in chan- nel no.
  • Page 953 ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference Example: *RST; :CALC2:PAR:SDEF 'Ch2Trc2', 'S11' Create channel 2 and a new trace named Ch2Trc2. CONF:TRAC:CAT? Query all traces and their names. As a default trace no. 1 is cre- ated upon *RST, the response is '1,Trc1,2,Ch2Trc2'. CONF:CHAN1:TRAC:CAT? Query the channels in channel no.
  • Page 954 ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference Example: *RST; :CALC:PAR:SDEF 'Trc2', 'S11' Create a trace named Trc2. CONF:TRAC:WIND:TRAC? 'Trc2' Query the diagram number for Trc2. The new trace is not dis- played, so the response is 0. DISP:WIND2:STAT ON Create a diagram no.
  • Page 955 ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference CONFigure:TRACe<Trc>:NAME <TraceName> Assigns a name to an existing trace number <Trc>. Note that it is not possible to assign the same name to two different traces. returns CONFigure:TRACe:CATalog? a list of all traces in the active recall set with their names. Suffix: <Trc>...

  • Page 956: Control Commands

    ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference 8.3.3 CONTrol Commands The Control... commands control the USER PORT connector, the Handler I/O con- nector (Universal Interface, option R&S ZN-B14 / R&S ZNBT-Z14) and the RFFE GPIO interface (option R&S ZN-B15/Z15)....................
  • Page 957 ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference ............972 CONTrol<Ch>:RFFE<Bus>:SETTings:VOLTage:IO ............972 CONTrol<Ch>:RFFE<Bus>:SETTings:VOLTage:LOW ............972 CONTrol<Ch>:RFFE<Bus>:SETTings:VOLTage:HIGH ................973 CONTrol<Ch>:RFFE<Bus>:TEST:DATA .................973 CONTrol<Ch>:RFFE<Bus>:TEST:CLOCk ................973 CONTrol<Ch>:RFFE<Bus>:TEST:VIO ............... 974 CONTrol<Ch>:RFFE<Bus>:TEST:DATA:RANGe .............974 CONTrol<Ch>:RFFE<Bus>:TEST:CLOCk:RANGe ..............974 CONTrol<Ch>:RFFE<Bus>:TEST:VIO:RANGe ............974 CONTrol<Ch>:RFFE<Bus>:TEST:CLOCk:SHUNt? .............. 974 CONTrol<Ch>:RFFE<Bus>:TEST:DATA:SHUNt? ..............974 CONTrol<Ch>:RFFE<Bus>:TEST:VIO:SHUNt? ..............975 CONTrol:RFFE<Bus>:TEST:DATA:VOLTage? ..............975 CONTrol:RFFE<Bus>:TEST:CLOCk:VOLTage? ..............975 CONTrol:RFFE<Bus>:TEST:VIO:VOLTage?
  • Page 958 ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference ● The signals are switched on as soon as a measurement (sweep) in a channel with non-zero channel bits is started. They are changed whenever a channel with differ- ent channel bits becomes the measuring channel. ●...
  • Page 959 ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference Suffix: <Port> GPIO port number. If ALL voltages are queried, this suffix is ignored and can be omitted. Query parameters: <ALL> Use ALL to measure the voltages at all GPIO pins. Return values: <Results>...
  • Page 960 ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference Example: CONTrol:GPIO:SENSe:SUMCurrent? 1,2,3,4,5 returns the sum of the currents measured in GPIO ports 1 to 5 Usage: Query only Options: R&S ZN-B15/Z15 Var. 03 Manual operation: "Voltage, Current" on page 515 CONTrol<Ch>:GPIO:SENSe:TRIGger Starts the voltage/current measurements on all GPIO pins.
  • Page 961 ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference Usage: Event Manual operation: "Apply" on page 514 CONTrol<Ch>:GPIO<Port>[:STATe] <EnableInSequence> Enables/disables GPIO port <port> in the Sweep Sequencer for channel <Ch> (see CONTrol<Ch>:SEQuence<Nr>:GPIO<Port>:VOLTage CONTrol<Ch>: SEGMent<Nr>:SEQuence<Nr>:GPIO<Port>:VOLTage). Suffix: <Ch> Channel number <Port> GPIO port number Parameters: <EnableInSequence>...
  • Page 962 ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference CONTrol<Ch>:GPIO<Port>:SHUNt? Returns the shunt resistance (in Ω) selected by the analyzer firmware for the config- ured current range (see CONTrol<Ch>:GPIO<Port>:RANGe). The dependency between current range and shunt resistance is displayed in the tables below.
  • Page 963 ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference CONTrol<Ch>:GPIO<Port>:VOLTage[:DEFault] <Voltage> Sets the output voltage of the respective GPIO port. This voltage is applied using CONTrol<Ch>:GPIO:VOLTage:OUTPut. Suffix: <Ch> Channel number <Port> GPIO port number Parameters: <Voltage> Range: -7 to +15 V Increment: 5 mV Default unit: V Manual operation:...
  • Page 964 ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference *RST: n/a (default: 0 (port A, B, and F); ports C, D, and E are configured as input ports.) Example: CONT:HAND:A:MODE OUTP Configure port A as an output port. CONT:HAND:A 192 Write data to port A. CONT:HAND:B:MODE INP Configure port B as an input port.
  • Page 965 ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference Example: CONT:HAND:EXT:IND:STAT ON Route the /INDEX signal to pin 20. CONT:HAND:EXT:RTR:STAT ON Route the /READY_FOR_TRIGGER signal to pin 21. CONT:HAND:RES Restore the default state: Pins no. 20 and 21 are available for port B input/output signals.
  • Page 966 ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference Parameters: <Logic> POSitive | NEGative POSitive – 0 = low, 1 = high NEGative – 0 = high, 1 = low Note:*RST or "Preset" do not change the configuration of the Universal Interface. Use to restore CONTrol:HANDler:RESet default values.
  • Page 967 ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference Parameters: <BinValue> 0 - high 1 - low *RST: n/a (default: 0) Example: CONT:HAND:OUTP2:DATA 0 Set the /OUTPUT2 line (pin 4) to 0 (current state of / OUTPUT2). CONT:HAND:OUTP2:USER 1 Define the next state of the /OUTPUT2 line as 1 (low). / OUTPUT2 will go from 0 to 1 when the analyzer receives a neg- ative pulse on the /INPUT1 line (pin 2).
  • Page 968 ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference *RST: n/a (default: NOWait) Example: Configure the /SWEEP END (pin 34) and /PASS FAIL (pin 33) signals: CONTrol:HANDler:SWEepend GLOBal Set the /SWEEP END line to low when all sweeps in all chan- nels are complete.
  • Page 969 ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference Parameters: <Scope> GLOBal | CHANnel CHANnel – when all the sweeps for each channel are complete GLOBal – when all sweeps in all channels are complete Note:*RST or "Preset" do not change the configuration of the Universal Interface.
  • Page 970 ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference SWEep – every time a sweep is complete CHANnel – when all the sweeps for each channel are complete GLOBal – when all sweeps in all channels are complete Note:*RST or "Preset" do not change the configuration of the Universal Interface.
  • Page 971 ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference Suffix: <Ch> Channel number This suffix is ignored and can be omitted. Usage: Event Options: R&S ZN-B15/Z15 Var. 03 Manual operation: "Start Meas" on page 513 CONTrol<Ch>:RFFE<Bus>:COMMand:DATA <Command> Defines an RFFE command for channel <Ch> and RFFE bus interface <Bus>, which can be executed using (write-only) or CONTrol<Ch>:RFFE<Bus>:COMMand:SEND...
  • Page 972 ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference <Bus> RFFE bus interface Query parameters: <BytesToRead> The number of bytes to be read back from the RFFE interface. *RST: 0 to 16 Manual operation: "SEND" on page 511 CONTrol<Ch>:RFFE<Bus>:SETTings[:STATe] <EnableInSequence> Enables/disables RFFE bus interface <Bus> in the Sweep Sequencer for channel <Ch>...
  • Page 973 ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference Suffix: <Ch> Channel number <Bus> RFFE bus number Parameters: <Voltage> Range: 0 to 2.5 V Increment: 0.001 V Default unit: V Manual operation: "CLK, VIO, VLow, VHigh" on page 510 CONTrol<Ch>:RFFE<Bus>:TEST:DATA <Test Data Voltage> CONTrol<Ch>:RFFE<Bus>:TEST:CLOCk <Test Clock Voltage>...

  • Page 974: Control:Rffe:Settings:voltage:io

    ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference CONTrol<Ch>:RFFE<Bus>:TEST:DATA:RANGe <Data Current Range> CONTrol<Ch>:RFFE<Bus>:TEST:CLOCk:RANGe <Clock Current Range> CONTrol<Ch>:RFFE<Bus>:TEST:VIO:RANGe <CurrentRange> Defines the (upper bound of the) current range for the voltage/current measurement on the respective RFFE pin. The analyzer firmware automatically selects a suitable shunt resistance, which can be queried using CONTrol<Ch>:RFFE<Bus>:TEST:VIO: SHUNt?.

  • Page 975: Control:rffe:Test:data:voltage

    ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference Manual operation: "Range / Shunt" on page 512 2 μA 20 μA 200 μA 2 mA 20 mA Shunt 10 Ω 100 Ω 1 kΩ 10 kΩ 100 kΩ CONTrol:RFFE<Bus>:TEST:DATA:VOLTage? CONTrol:RFFE<Bus>:TEST:CLOCk:VOLTage? CONTrol:RFFE<Bus>:TEST:VIO:VOLTage? Returns the results of the voltage measurement on the related RFFE pin.

  • Page 976: Control:Segment:Sequence:clear:all

    ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference Usage: Query only Manual operation: "Range" on page 516 CONTrol<Ch>:SEGMent<Nr>:SEQuence:CLEar:ALL For segmented sweeps this command deletes the command/switch sequence for the respective channel and sweep segment (defined using CONTrol<Ch>: SEGMent<Nr>:SEQuence<Nr>:RFFE<Bus>:COMMand:DATA CONTrol<Ch>: SEGMent<Nr>:SEQuence<Nr>:GPIO<Port>:VOLTage). Suffix: <Ch>...

  • Page 977: Control:Segment:Sequence:Delay

    ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference Suffix: <Ch> Channel number <Nr> Segment number <Nr> Sequence number, defining the order in which the switches/ commands shall be executed. For every channel, segment and GPIO port, the sequence num- bers must be consecutive, starting at 1; reusing a sequence number overwrites a previous voltage setting.

  • Page 978: Control:Sequence:clear:all

    ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference Manual operation: "RFFE columns (sweep sequencer table)" on page 516 CONTrol<Ch>:SEQuence:CLEar:ALL For unsegmented sweeps this command deletes the command/switch sequence for the respective channel (defined using CONTrol<Ch>:SEQuence<Nr>:RFFE<Bus>: and CONTrol<Ch>:SEQuence<Nr>:GPIO<Port>:VOLTage). COMMand:DATA Suffix: <Ch> Channel number Usage: Event...

  • Page 979: Control:Sequence:Rffe:Command:data

    ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference CONTrol<Ch>:SEQuence<Nr>:GPIO<Port>:VOLTage <Voltage> For unsegmented sweeps this command allows to define the GPIO voltage settings to be applied at the start of each sweep. The GPIO ports can be enabled/disabled using CONTrol<Ch>:GPIO<Port>[: STATe]. Complementary RFFE commands can be defined using CONTrol<Ch>: SEQuence<Nr>:RFFE<Bus>:COMMand:DATA.

  • Page 980: Diagnostic Commands

    ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference Parameters: <Command> 3 to 37 hexadecimal digits (0-F), defining the command to be executed: digit 1 is the slave address, digits 2 and 3 specify the command number and the remaining digits represent the data part (up to 17 digit pairs).
  • Page 981 ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference Parameters: <DumpSize> NONE | MINI | NORMal | LARGe | FULL Either disables dump file creation (NONE) or determines the level of detail. Manual operation: "Error Dump Type" on page 680 DIAGnostic:PRODuct:OPTion:INFO? <Option>, <Detail> Queries a property of an installed software option, identified by its name.

  • Page 982: Display Commands

    ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference Example: DIAGnostic:SERVice:SFUNction? 'sw.common.memory_usage' This is an "Info Level" service function, i.e. it is not password- protected. It returns the curent memory usage of the analyzer firmware. Manual operation: "Service Function" on page 686 8.3.5 DISPlay Commands The DISPlay...
  • Page 983 ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference ..............986 DISPlay[:WINDow<Wnd>]:OVERview[:STATe] ..................986 DISPlay[:WINDow<Wnd>]:NAME ................. 987 DISPlay[:WINDow<Wnd>]:TITLe[:STATe] ................987 DISPlay[:WINDow<Wnd>]:TITLe:DATA ............987 DISPlay[:WINDow<Wnd>]:TRACe<WndTr>:CATalog? ............988 DISPlay[:WINDow<Wnd>]:TRACe<WndTr>:DELete ............988 DISPlay[:WINDow<Wnd>]:TRACe<WndTr>:EFEed ............989 DISPlay[:WINDow<Wnd>]:TRACe<WndTr>:FEED ..........989 DISPlay[:WINDow<Wnd>]:TRACe<WndTr>:LABel:SHOW ............990 DISPlay[:WINDow<Wnd>]:TRACe<WndTr>:SHOW ............991 DISPlay[:WINDow<Wnd>]:TRACe<WndTr>:X:OFFSet ..........991 DISPlay[:WINDow<Wnd>]:TRACe<WndTr>:Y[:SCALe]:AUTO ........
  • Page 984 ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference Parameters: <Boolean> 0 – hide the "Info Window" (default) 1 – show the "Info Window" Manual operation: "Info Window" on page 664 DISPlay:IWINdow:BFILter[:STATe] <TraceName>, <BandfilterItem>, <Boolean> Defines the bandfilter search results to be displayed in the Info Window.
  • Page 985 ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference Example: CALC4:PAR:SDEF 'Ch4Tr1', 'S11' Create channel 4 and a trace named Ch4Tr1 to measure the input reflection coefficient S DISP:WIND2:STAT ON Create diagram area no. 2. DISP:WIND2:TRAC9:FEED 'CH4TR1' Display the generated trace in diagram area no. 2, assigning the trace number 9 to it.
  • Page 986 ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference Suffix: <Wnd> Number of the diagram area to become the active diagram area. DISPlay:WINDow<Wnd>:MAXimize acts on all diagrams of the current recall set, however, the diagram no. <Wnd> is dis- played on top of the others. Parameters: <Boolean>...

  • Page 987: Display[:Window]:Title:data

    ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference DISPlay[:WINDow<Wnd>]:TITLe[:STATe] <Boolean> Displays or hides the title for area number <Wnd>, defined by means of DISPlay:WINDow<Wnd>:TITLe:DATA. Suffix: <Wnd> Number of the diagram area. Parameters: <Boolean> ON | OFF - displays or hides the title. *RST: Example: DISPlay[:WINDow<Wnd>]:TITLe:DATA...

  • Page 988: Display[:Window]:Trace:Delete

    ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference DISPlay[:WINDow<Wnd>]:TRACe<WndTr>:DELete Releases the assignment between a trace and a diagram area, as defined by means of <TraceName> and expressed by DISPlay[:WINDow<Wnd>]:TRACe<WndTr>:FEED the <WndTr> suffix. The trace itself is not deleted; this must be done via CALCulate<Ch>:PARameter:DELete <TraceName>.

  • Page 989: Display[:Window]:Trace:Label:show

    ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference Example: CALC4:PAR:SDEF 'Ch4Tr1', 'S11' Create channel 4 and a trace named Ch4Tr1 to measure the input reflection coefficient S DISP:WIND2:STAT ON Create diagram area no. 2. DISP:WIND2:TRAC:EFE 'CH4TR1' Display the generated trace in diagram area no. 2. No trace number is assigned.
  • Page 990 ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference <WndTr> ignored Parameters: <TraceName> Trace name (string parameter), e.g. 'Trc4' ON | OFF – display or hide the label of the related trace <Boolean> Example: *RST; :DISP:TRAC:LAB:SHOW? 'Trc1' Reset the analyzer, creating the default trace 'Trc1'. The trace label is displayed;...
  • Page 991 ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference DISPlay[:WINDow<Wnd>]:TRACe<WndTr>:X:OFFSet <StimulusOffset> Shifts the trace <WndTr> in horizontal direction, leaving the positions of all markers unchanged. Suffix: <Wnd> Number of an existing diagram area (defined by means of DISPlay[:WINDow<Wnd>][:STATe] ON). <WndTr> Existing trace number, assigned by means of DISPlay[: WINDow<Wnd>]:TRACe<WndTr>:FEED.
  • Page 992 ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference Example: *RST; DISP:WIND:TRAC:Y:PDIV?; RLEV? Query the value between two grid lines and the reference value for the default trace. The response is 10;0. DISP:WIND:TRAC:Y:AUTO ONCE; PDIV?; RLEV? DISP:WIND:TRAC:Y:AUTO ONCE, 'Trc1'; PDIV?; RLEV? Autoscale the default trace and query the scaling parameters again.
  • Page 993 ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference Example: CALC4:PAR:SDEF 'Ch4Tr1', 'S11' Create channel 4 and a trace named Ch4Tr1 to measure the input reflection coefficient S DISP:WIND2:STAT ON Create diagram area no. 2. DISP:WIND2:TRAC9:FEED 'CH4TR1' Display the generated trace in diagram area no. 2, assigning the trace number 9 to it.
  • Page 994 ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference Example: CALC4:PAR:SDEF 'Ch4Tr1', 'S11' Create channel 4 and a trace named Ch4Tr1 to measure the input reflection coefficient S DISP:WIND2:STAT ON Create diagram area no. 2. DISP:WIND2:TRAC9:FEED 'CH4TR1' Display the generated trace in diagram area no. 2, assigning the trace number 9 to it.
  • Page 995 ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference Example: CALC4:PAR:SDEF 'Ch4Tr1', 'S11' Create channel 4 and a trace named Ch4Tr1 to measure the input reflection coefficient S DISP:WIND2:STAT ON Create diagram area no. 2. DISP:WIND2:TRAC9:FEED 'CH4TR1' Display the generated trace in diagram area no. 2, assigning the trace number 9 to it.

  • Page 996: Display[:Window]:Trace:X:offset

    ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference Example: CALC4:PAR:SDEF 'Ch4Tr1', 'S11' Create channel 4 and a trace named Ch4Tr1 to measure the input reflection coefficient S DISP:WIND2:STAT ON Create diagram area no. 2. DISP:WIND2:TRAC9:FEED 'CH4TR1' Display the generated trace in diagram area no. 2, assigning the trace number 9 to it.
  • Page 997 ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference Example: *RST; :DISP:WIND:TRAC:X:OFFS 1MHZ; :DISP:WIND: TRAC:Y:OFFS 10 Create the default trace and shift it horizontally by 1 MHz, verti- cally by 10 dB. DISP:WIND:TRAC:Y:OFFS? Query all response offset values. The response is 10,0,0,0. Manual operation: "Mag / Phase / Real / Imag"...
  • Page 998 ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference DISPlay[:WINDow<Wnd>]:TRACe<WndTr>:ZOOM:STARt <LeftBorder>[, <TraceName>] DISPlay[:WINDow<Wnd>]:TRACe<WndTr>:ZOOM:STOP <RightBorder>[, <TraceName>] These commands specify the start and stop values of the zoom window (left and right border), respectively. In contrast to manual control, all or part of the zoom window may be outside the original diagram.
  • Page 999 ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference Parameters: <UppEdge> Lower or upper edge of the zoom window. Range and unit depend on the measured quantity, see "Units for DISPlay... com- mands" on page 982. Default unit: NN <TraceName> Optional string parameter for the trace name, e.g. 'Trc4'. If this optional parameter is present, both numeric suffixes are ignored (trace names must be unique across different channels and win- dows).

  • Page 1000: Display:cmap:limit[:State]

    ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference Example: DISPlay:CMAP:LIMit[:STATe] Manual operation: "Limit Test > Colorize Trace when Failed" on page 665 DISPlay:CMAP:LIMit:FSYMbol[:STATe] <Boolean> Displays or hides the limit fail symbols (colored squares) on the trace. Parameters: <Boolean> ON | OFF - show or hide symbols. *RST: n/a (a *RST does not affect the setting).

This manual is also suitable for:

R&s znbtR&s znb4R&s znb8R&s znb20R&s znb40R&s znbt8 ... Show all

Table of Contents

Save PDF